Small syntax fixes mostly to Ezra but touched a few other books also (#2049)

Co-authored-by: Robert Hunt <Freely.Given.org@gmail.com>
Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2049
Co-authored-by: Robert Hunt <robh@noreply.door43.org>
Co-committed-by: Robert Hunt <robh@noreply.door43.org>
This commit is contained in:
Robert Hunt 2021-08-30 04:13:58 +00:00
parent 594f7eaab9
commit 99e76ef628
6 changed files with 81 additions and 81 deletions

View File

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
EZR front intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Ezra<br><br>1. The first Jewish exiles return to Jerusalem from Persia (1:12:70)<br>2. The people rebuild and dedicate the temple in Jerusalem (3:16:22)<br>3. More exiles return; Ezra teaches the Law of Yahweh (7:1-8:36)<br>4. The problem of the people marrying foreigners, and how it is solved (9:110:44)<br><br>### What is the Book of Ezra about?<br><br>The book of Ezra is about how the people of Israel returned from Babylon and tried to worship Yahweh again as the law required. To do this, they needed to rebuild their temple so that they could sacrifice to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>The book of Ezra is named for the priest Ezra who led the first group of Jews out of exile and back to Judah. Translators can use the traditional title “Ezra.” Or they might choose a clearer title, such as “The Book about Ezra.”<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Why were Israelites not allowed to marry people from other nations?<br><br>Foreigners worshiped many false gods. Yahweh did not allow his people to marry foreigners because he knew that this would cause the people of Israel to worship false gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Did all of the people of Israel return to their homeland?<br><br>Many of the Jews remained in Babylon instead of returning to the land of Israel. Many of them were successful in Babylon and desired to remain there. However, this meant that they were unable to worship Yahweh in Jerusalem as their ancestors had done.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### How does the Book of Ezra use the term “Israel”?<br><br>The book of Ezra uses the term “Israel” to refer to the kingdom of Judah. It was mostly made up of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin. The other ten tribes had ended their loyalty to any kings descended from David. God allowed the Assyrians to conquer the other ten tribes and take them into exile. As a result, they mixed with other people groups and did not return to the land of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/israel]])<br><br>### Are the events in the Book of Ezra told in the order that they actually happened?<br><br>Some of the events in the Book of Ezra are not told in the order that they happened, but are grouped according to theme. Translators should pay attention to notes that signal when events are probably out of chronological order.
EZR 1 intro dd25 0 # Ezra 01 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The chapter records the story of the first Jews as they return from Persia to Judea.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### King Cyrus<br><br>King Cyrus allowed the Jews to return because he wanted them to rebuild the temple. Those who stayed behind gave gifts to those who left to help them on their journey and resettlement. This practice was common under the reign of Cyrus and was used as a way to maintain peace throughout his kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Jews<br><br>After they returned to Judea, the focus of the rest of the Old Testament is on the Jewish people.
EZR 1 intro dd25 0 # Ezra 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The chapter records the story of the first Jews as they return from Persia to Judea.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### King Cyrus<br><br>King Cyrus allowed the Jews to return because he wanted them to rebuild the temple. Those who stayed behind gave gifts to those who left to help them on their journey and resettlement. This practice was common under the reign of Cyrus and was used as a way to maintain peace throughout his kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Jews<br><br>After they returned to Judea, the focus of the rest of the Old Testament is on the Jewish people.
EZR 1 1 nnrv writing-newevent וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת 1 The word **now** introduces a new event in the story. Use the normal method for introducing the beginning of a true story in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EZR 1 1 ath4 figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת אַחַ֗ת לְ⁠כ֨וֹרֶשׁ֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ פָּרַ֔ס 1 The original Jewish readers of this book would have known that this is not a reference to the year when Cyrus first became king of the Persians. Rather, it is a reference to the later year when, by conquering Babylon, he became king over the Jews, since Babylon is the nation that had previously conquered the Jews and taken them into exile. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “During the first year after Cyrus, the king of Persia, conquered Babylon and became ruler over the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 1 1 qvp1 וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת אַחַ֗ת לְ⁠כ֨וֹרֶשׁ֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ פָּרַ֔ס 1 This expression could mean that sometime during the first year that he ruled over the Jews, Cyrus issued the decree that this verse describes. However, it could also mean that he issued this decree as soon as he became their ruler. Alternate translation: “As soon as Cyrus, the king of Persia, conquered Babylon and became the ruler of the Jews”
@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ EZR 1 3 hz9g figs-idiom וְ⁠יַ֕עַל לִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֖ם 1 C
EZR 1 3 k839 figs-distinguish לִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִַ֖ם אֲשֶׁ֣ר בִּ⁠יהוּדָ֑ה 1 Cyrus once again provides background information about the city. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, in the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EZR 1 3 gxbj figs-metaphor בֵּ֤ית יְהוָה֙ 1 Here, **house** figuratively means a temple. Cyrus continues to speak of this temple as if it would be a house in which Yahweh lived, since Yahwehs presence would be there. Alternate translation: “a temple for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 1 3 o6x4 figs-distinguish יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל ה֥וּא הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם׃ 1 Here Cyrus provides further background information to inform his subjects who Yahweh is. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worship, who should have a temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EZR 1 3 3gt1 figs-possession אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The phrase **the God of Israel** does not mean that God belongs to Israel, but that this is the God whom Israel worships. Alternate translation: “the God whom Israel worships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
EZR 1 3 agt1 figs-possession אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The phrase **the God of Israel** does not mean that God belongs to Israel, but that this is the God whom Israel worships. Alternate translation: “the God whom Israel worships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
EZR 1 4 t7ux וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠נִּשְׁאָ֗ר מִֽ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠מְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ יְנַשְּׂא֨וּ⁠הוּ֙ אַנְשֵׁ֣י מְקֹמ֔⁠וֹ 1 Whoever survives in any place where he lives, let the people in that place help him The structure of this sentence may present difficulties for translation because the long phrase at the beginning actually describes who will receive the action, rather than who will do the action. To make things clearer for your readers, you could say first who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Let the people who live in any place where Jewish survivors are in exile help them”
EZR 1 4 fr03 figs-idiom וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠נִּשְׁאָ֗ר 1 This phrase refers to any Israelite who is a surviving member of the group that was taken into exile, or who is a descendant of someone in that group. The word **remaining** refers to people who are remaining or left over from a larger group. In this context, that larger group is all of the Israelites who lived in the land of Judah before the Babylonians conquered it. Alternate translation: “Any survivor of the Jews who were taken from their land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 1 4 vvzw figs-idiom מִֽ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠מְּקֹמוֹת֮ אֲשֶׁ֣ר ה֣וּא גָֽר־שָׁם֒ 1 **Sojourning** means living somewhere other than in ones native land. Here, **he** refers to any Jew such as is described in the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “in any of the places where a Jew may be living in exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -60,13 +60,13 @@ EZR 1 8 w8rk figs-idiom וַֽ⁠יִּסְפְּרֵ⁠ם֙ לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁ
EZR 1 8 wb5a translate-names לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֔ר 1 This leader of the first group of exiles to return to Judah, who is called **Sheshbazzar** here and in [1:11](../01/11.md), [5:14](../05/14.md), and [5:16](../05/16.md), seems to be the same person who is called Zerubbabel in the rest of the book. The reason for the difference in names is not clear. Some interpreters suggest that he was known as Sheshbazzar in the Persian court and that he used the name Zerubbabel as governor of Judah. There are examples in the Bible of Jews having both a Persian name and a Hebrew name. It would probably be best simply to translate both names consistently where they appear without calling attention to the difference, but you could add this possible explanation in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 1 8 qsti הַ⁠נָּשִׂ֖יא לִ⁠יהוּדָֽה׃ 1 The book says in [5:14](../05/14.md) that Cyrus appointed Sheshbazzar to be the governor of the province of Judah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use that phrase to describe him here. Alternate translation: “whom Cyrus had appointed to be the governor of the province of Judah”
EZR 1 9 hu9c figs-idiom וְ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה מִסְפָּרָ֑⁠ם 1 General Information: This expression means that what follows is the number of each kind of utensil that Cyrus is returning (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 1 9 noww מַחֲלָפִ֖ים 1 General Information: This word occurs only here in the Hebrew Bible, and there is some disagreement about its meaning. It is probably a borrowed term from a related language that means<br>“knife, <br>” but the ancient Greek translation took its meaning to be “replacements,<br>that is, basins to replace others that became unusable. You may see translations that follow the ancient Greek, but we recommend following the Hebrew.<br>
EZR 1 9 noww מַחֲלָפִ֖ים 1 General Information: This word occurs only here in the Hebrew Bible, and there is some disagreement about its meaning. It is probably a borrowed term from a related language that means<br>“knife,”<br>but the ancient Greek translation took its meaning to be “replacements,<br>that is, basins to replace others that became unusable. You may see translations that follow the ancient Greek, but we recommend following the Hebrew.
EZR 1 10 ja6u כְּפ֤וֹרֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ מִשְׁנִ֔ים 1 bowls This means that these bowls were a different type of bowl than the gold ones just mentioned. This could also mean that they were second in rank of status or honor behind the gold bowls. It does not mean that the silver was of a different type than the silver in the basins described in [1:9](../01/09.md).
EZR 1 11 z55f כָּל־כֵּלִים֙ לַ⁠זָּהָ֣ב וְ⁠לַ⁠כֶּ֔סֶף חֲמֵ֥שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֖ים וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֣ע מֵא֑וֹת 1 5400 This expression means that the total number of these gold and silver objects was **5,400**. Verses [1:9](../01/09.md) and [1:10](../01/10.md) actually list only 2,499 items, and it is not clear why the numbers are different. The explanation does not seem to be that the total here includes other miscellaneous items because the last item on the list itself is other vessels. It would probably be best simply to report this total without calling attention to the difference and trying to explain it, since there is no clear reason for it.
EZR 1 11 i30r figs-idiom הַ⁠כֹּ֞ל הֶעֱלָ֣ה שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֗ר עִ֚ם הֵעָל֣וֹת הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֔ה מִ⁠בָּבֶ֖ל לִ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 Like the similar expression in [1:3](../01/03.md), here the book says **brought up** and **going up** because the Jews had to travel from a river valley up into the mountains to return from exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Sheshbazzar brought all these vessels along when he traveled to Jerusalem with the group of Jews who had been taken away from their homeland but who were now returning from Babylon to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 1 11 kt84 figs-abstractnouns הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֔ה 1 The abstract noun **exiles** refers, in this context, to the community of Jews who were living in Babylon because the Babylonians had relocated them away from their homeland when they conquered Jerusalem. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the group of Jews who had been taken away from their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 1 11 fi2e translate-names מִ⁠בָּבֶ֖ל 1 **Babylon** is the name of a city. The book also uses this name for the empire that was once ruled from that city, and for the region that had been at the heart of this empire that became a province in the Persian Empire. The name occurs many times in the book, and it will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 intro rr42 0 # Ezra 02 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>People had to prove through their genealogies that they were priests or that they<br>were even Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]])
EZR 2 intro rr42 0 # Ezra 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Genealogy<br><br>People had to prove through their genealogies that they were priests or that they<br>were even Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]])
EZR 2 1 ezk9 figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מְּדִינָ֗ה 1 General Information: Here, **the sons of the province** is an idiom that means that these people originated in the province of Judah. Alternate translation: “the people from the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 1 ponw figs-metonymy הַ⁠מְּדִינָ֗ה 1 **The province** means the province of Judah. The book is referring to Judah by something associated with it, its status as a province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 2 1 byc2 figs-idiom הָֽ⁠עֹלִים֙ 1 went up **Went up** means traveled from Babylon back to Judah, since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “those who returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -113,13 +113,13 @@ EZR 2 19 i6kg figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 General Information:
EZR 2 19 j9nm translate-names חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 Hashum **Hashum** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 20 r5bq figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֥י גִבָּ֖ר 1 Gibbar Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Gibbar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 20 g26q translate-names גִבָּ֖ר 1 ninety-five **Gibbar** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 21 iu4s figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י בֵֽית־לָ֔חֶם מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָֽׁה 1 The sons of Bethlehem The list speaks here of the **sons of Bethlehem**. This is an idiom that means that <br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Bethlehem, 123 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 21 iu4s figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י בֵֽית־לָ֔חֶם מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָֽׁה 1 The sons of Bethlehem The list speaks here of the **sons of Bethlehem**. This is an idiom that means that<br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Bethlehem, 123 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 21 j7z9 translate-names בֵֽית־לָ֔חֶם 1 **Bethlehem** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 22 v2ky translate-names אַנְשֵׁ֥י נְטֹפָ֖ה חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּֽׁה׃ 1 Netophah **Netophah** is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Netophah, 56 returned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 23 l29x translate-names אַנְשֵׁ֣י עֲנָת֔וֹת מֵאָ֖ה עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָֽה 1 Anathoth **Anathoth** is the name of a town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Anathoth, 128 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 24 qlw7 figs-idiom בְּנֵ֥י עַזְמָ֖וֶת 1 forty-two The list speaks here of the **sons of Azmaveth**. This is an idiom that means that <br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Azmaveth, 42 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 24 qlw7 figs-idiom בְּנֵ֥י עַזְמָ֖וֶת 1 forty-two The list speaks here of the **sons of Azmaveth**. This is an idiom that means that<br>these men were from families that had originally lived in that town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Azmaveth, 42 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 24 d37s translate-names עַזְמָ֖וֶת 1 Azmaveth **Azmaveth** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 25 y9xa figs-idiom בְּנֵ֨י קִרְיַ֤ת עָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֔וֹת 1 Kiriath Arim … Kephirah … Beeroth The list speaks here of the **sons of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth**. <br>This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns. Alternate translation: “From the towns of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 25 y9xa figs-idiom בְּנֵ֨י קִרְיַ֤ת עָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֔וֹת 1 Kiriath Arim … Kephirah … Beeroth The list speaks here of the **sons of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth**.<br>This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns. Alternate translation: “From the towns of Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah, and Beeroth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 25 rw2o translate-names קִרְיַ֤ת עָרִים֙ כְּפִירָ֣ה וּ⁠בְאֵר֔וֹת 1 **Kirjath-Arim, Kephirah**, and **Beeroth** are the names of towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 26 iyhq figs-idiom בְּנֵ֤י הָ⁠רָמָה֙ וָ⁠גָ֔בַע 1 The list speaks here of the **sons of Ramah and Geba**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns.<br>Alternate translation: “From the towns of Ramah and Geba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 2 26 k69y translate-names הָ⁠רָמָה֙ וָ⁠גָ֔בַע 1 Geba **Ramah** and **Geba** are the names of towns. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ EZR 2 36 c52r הַֽ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֑ים 1 General Information: **The priest
EZR 2 36 xd3k figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֤י יְדַֽעְיָה֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ תְּשַׁ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת שִׁבְעִ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁלֹשָֽׁה 1 Jedaiah Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jedaiah who were descendants of Jeshua, 973 returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 36 m352 translate-names יְדַֽעְיָה֙…יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 Jeshua **Jedaiah** is the name of a man, and **Jeshua** is the name of one of his male descendants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 36 u51b figs-metonymy לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 Here, **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. The book is describing all of the descendants **of Jeshua** figuratively as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “who were descendants of Jeshua” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 2 37 vauy figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י אִמֵּ֔ר 1 Here,**sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Immer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 37 vauy figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י אִמֵּ֔ר 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Immer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 37 u9p4 translate-names אִמֵּ֔ר 1 **Immer** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 38 fvt0 figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י פַשְׁח֔וּר 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pashhur” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 38 w3dr translate-names פַשְׁח֔וּר 1 **Pashhur** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -188,17 +188,17 @@ EZR 2 59 ay8y figs-parallelism בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙ וְ⁠זַרְ
EZR 2 59 an9o figs-metaphor בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 Among the Israelites, the expressions fathers house or **house of their fathers** originally described an extended-family group. It later came to be used more generally to refer to a larger clan within a tribe. In this expression, the word “house” figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “what clan they were from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 59 yqp3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠זַרְעָ֔⁠ם 1 Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning "offspring." In the Bible, the term refers most often to a persons descendants. Here it is describing the ancestors of these people, that is, whose seed they were. Alternate translation: “or who their ancestors were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 60 k7wr בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א שֵׁ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת חֲמִשִּׁ֥ים וּ⁠שְׁנָֽיִם 1 652 Alternate translation: “In this group were 652 men from the descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda”
EZR 2 60 v01g figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Either the men named here were not recognized clan heads of Israel, or the 652 people could not prove that they were descendants of these men. Alternate translation: “The descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 60 v01g figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־דְלָיָ֥ה בְנֵי־טוֹבִיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י נְקוֹדָ֑א 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Either the men named here were not recognized clan heads of Israel, or the 652 people could not prove that they were descendants of these men. Alternate translation: “The descendants of Delaiah, Tobiah, and Nekoda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 60 xr2g translate-names דְלָיָ֥ה…טוֹבִיָּ֖ה…נְקוֹדָ֑א 1 Delaiah … Tobiah … Nekoda These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 61 io29 וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠כֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “Some of the men who returned from those towns were descendants of the priests”
EZR 2 61 heb8 figs-metaphor וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠כֹּ֣הֲנִ֔ים 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “And descendants of the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 61 mpkp figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֥י חֳבַיָּ֖ה בְּנֵ֣י הַקּ֑וֹץ בְּנֵ֣י בַרְזִלַּ֗י 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. Alternate translation: “they were from the descendants of Habaiah, Hakkoz, and Barzillai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 61 vg3t translate-names חֳבַיָּ֖ה…הַקּ֑וֹץ…בַרְזִלַּ֗י 1 Habaiah … Hakkoz … Barzillai These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 2 61 d6en אֲשֶׁ֣ר לָ֠קַח מִ⁠בְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַ⁠גִּלְעָדִי֙ אִשָּׁ֔ה 1 You could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Barzillai married a woman who was one of the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite”
EZR 2 61 bwy5 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַ⁠גִּלְעָדִי֙ 1 Here, **daughters** figuratively means female descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 61 bwy5 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנ֞וֹת בַּרְזִלַּ֤י הַ⁠גִּלְעָדִי֙ 1 Here, **daughters** figuratively means female descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Barzillai the Gileadite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 2 61 cxge וַ⁠יִּקָּרֵ֖א עַל־שְׁמָֽ⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “and he took the name of her clan as his own name”
EZR 2 62 yiq1 figs-activepassive אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛⁠ם הַ⁠מִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים 1 the records of their ancestry If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “They searched for a mention of their names in the lists of people who were descendants of the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 2 62 epi8 figs-activepassive אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛⁠ם הַ⁠מִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים וְ⁠לֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑אוּ 1 the records of their ancestry There are two possible meanings for what these people **sought** in the **record**. (1) They were seeking their own names from among a list of descendants from Israelite clan leaders. See the UST. (2) They were seeking the names of the clan leaders listed in verse 61 from among a list of names of Israelite clan leaders. Alternate translation: “The people in that group searched in the documents that had the names of the ancestors of all the clans, but they did not find the names of these men” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])<br><br>
EZR 2 62 epi8 figs-activepassive אֵ֗לֶּה בִּקְשׁ֧וּ כְתָבָ֛⁠ם הַ⁠מִּתְיַחְשִׂ֖ים וְ⁠לֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑אוּ 1 the records of their ancestry There are two possible meanings for what these people **sought** in the **record**. (1) They were seeking their own names from among a list of descendants from Israelite clan leaders. See the UST. (2) They were seeking the names of the clan leaders listed in verse 61 from among a list of names of Israelite clan leaders. Alternate translation: “The people in that group searched in the documents that had the names of the ancestors of all the clans, but they did not find the names of these men”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])<br><br>
EZR 2 62 lls0 figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹ֣א נִמְצָ֑אוּ 1 the records of their ancestry If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “but they were not able to find any mention of their names there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 2 62 r2wi figs-activepassive וַֽ⁠יְגֹאֲל֖וּ מִן־הַ⁠כְּהֻנָּֽה 1 the records of their ancestry If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “So the Jewish officials did not allow them to be priests" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 2 62 qt2w figs-abstractnouns וַֽ⁠יְגֹאֲל֖וּ מִן־הַ⁠כְּהֻנָּֽה 1 they were excluded from the priesthood as defiled The abstract noun **priesthood** refers to the work that a priest does and the status that a priest holds as a representative of God to the people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “And so they were not allowed to serve as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ EZR 2 69 ln9c translate-bmoney וְ⁠כֶ֕סֶף מָנִ֖ים חֲמֵ֣שׁ
EZR 2 69 h3zd translate-unknown וְ⁠כָתְנֹ֥ת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים מֵאָֽה 1 tunics **Tunics** were the special garments that priests would wear while performing their duties in the temple. Alternate translation: “100 special garments for the priests to wear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EZR 2 70 w7fw וַ⁠יֵּשְׁב֣וּ הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ֠⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּם וּֽ⁠מִן־הָ⁠עָ֞ם וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֧ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֛ים וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֖ים בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and all Israel lived in their cities This is a summary conclusion to the list. See how you translated each of these terms within the list: priests in v. [36](../02/36.md), Levites in v. [40](../02/40.md), singers in v. [41](../02/41.md), gatekeepers in v. [42](../02/42.md), and Nethinim in v. [43](../02/43.md). Review the notes to each of these verses if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “So the priests, Levites, other Israelites, singers, gatekeepers, and temple servants returned to Judah and settled in the places where their ancestors had formerly lived”
EZR 2 70 gg6o figs-parallelism וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This sentence summarizes the previous sentence, which was itself a summary of the chapter. It shows the result of the journey, that the return of the Israelites was accomplished successfully. You could include this meaning with the previous sentence if stating it separately might be confusing for your readers because of the repetition. Its meaning is included in the alternate translation suggested for the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 3 intro rp9a 0 # Ezra 03 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of worship in the new temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>They immediately began the temple worship even though the temple had not yet been built because they feared the people of the surrounding nations.
EZR 3 intro rp9a 0 # Ezra 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of worship in the new temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>They immediately began the temple worship even though the temple had not yet been built because they feared the people of the surrounding nations.
EZR 3 1 us0g grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יִּגַּע֙ 1 The word **then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After this group had returned to Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EZR 3 1 lr47 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּגַּע֙ הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 This phrase refers to the beginning of the seventh month in the Jewish religious calendar, which is the first month in the Jewish civic calendar. The phrase is actually giving the reason why the people gathered in Jerusalem at this time. It was the start of a new year, and the leadership had decided to resume community worship, including daily sacrifices, as of the beginning of that year, as [3:6](../03/06.md) indicates. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “At the start of the seventh month, because it was the beginning of a new civic year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 3 1 h84e translate-ordinal הַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ EZR 3 13 isem grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠אֵ֣ין הָ⁠עָ֗ם מ
EZR 3 13 fpsh grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠אֵ֣ין הָ⁠עָ֗ם מַכִּירִים֙ ק֚וֹל תְּרוּעַ֣ת הַ⁠שִּׂמְחָ֔ה לְ⁠ק֖וֹל בְּכִ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם כִּ֣י הָ⁠עָ֗ם מְרִיעִים֙ תְּרוּעָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the people who were happy were shouting so loudly, no one could distinguish their cries from the sounds of weeping of the other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 3 13 u6pc figs-explicit וְ⁠אֵ֣ין הָ⁠עָ֗ם מַכִּירִים֙ ק֚וֹל תְּרוּעַ֣ת הַ⁠שִּׂמְחָ֔ה לְ⁠ק֖וֹל בְּכִ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם כִּ֣י הָ⁠עָ֗ם מְרִיעִים֙ תְּרוּעָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 In its first occurrence here, the phrase **the people** means all the Israelites who had gathered for this ceremony. In its second occurrence, the phrase refers to one group of them, the older leaders who had seen the first temple and were weeping. In its third occurrence, it refers to another group of them, the younger Israelites who were shouting for joy. Alternate translation: “Because the people who were happy were shouting so loudly, no one at the ceremony could distinguish their cries from the sounds of the people who were weeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 3 13 rvdj figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠קּ֥וֹל נִשְׁמַ֖ע עַד־לְ⁠מֵ⁠רָחֽוֹק 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the combined sound was so loud that those who lived far away from Jerusalem could hear it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 4 intro x878 0 # Ezra 04 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Helping to build the temple<br><br>The people of the surrounding nations offered to help to build the temple. It is unknown why the Jews refused their help, although it seems likely that the Jews considered these people to not truly belong to the people of God. These other people became their enemies and tried to hinder the work. They even persuaded the king of Persia to stop the Jews from building.
EZR 4 intro x878 0 # Ezra 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Helping to build the temple<br><br>The people of the surrounding nations offered to help to build the temple. It is unknown why the Jews refused their help, although it seems likely that the Jews considered these people to not truly belong to the people of God. These other people became their enemies and tried to hinder the work. They even persuaded the king of Persia to stop the Jews from building.
EZR 4 1 v368 writing-background וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁמְע֔וּ 1 General Information: The word **Now** indicates that the sentence it introduces will provide background information that will be needed to understand what the book describes next. You can translate it with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EZR 4 1 miqb figs-personification יְהוּדָ֖ה וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 Here the book is referring figuratively to the people who came from the tribe of Judah as if they were a single person, their ancestor Judah. It is referring similarly to the people of the tribe of Benjamin as if they were a single person, their ancestor Benjamin. Alternate translation: “the people of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EZR 4 1 i4dx figs-hendiadys יְהוּדָ֖ה וּ⁠בִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 Here the book may be expressing a single idea figuratively by using two words connected with **and**. Together the two words may be a way of referring to all of the Israelites, since at this point the community consisted essentially of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ EZR 4 3 xp3f translate-names זְרֻבָּבֶ֜ל וְ⁠יֵשׁ֗וּעַ 1
EZR 4 3 hbhq figs-ellipsis רָאשֵׁ֤י הָֽ⁠אָבוֹת֙ 1 This is an abbreviated way of saying “**the heads of** fathers houses.” See how you translated this expression in [1:5](../01/05.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EZR 4 3 isv8 figs-idiom לֹֽא־לָ֣⁠כֶם וָ⁠לָ֔⁠נוּ 1 You may not build a house for our God with us This expression is an idiom that means “it is for us alone.” Alternate translation: “You may not help us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 4 3 bl6x figs-metaphor בַּ֖יִת לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 Alternate translation: “a temple for our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 4 3 0u2w figs-exclusive לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 Here, **our** is exclusive, excluding the non-Jewish hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 4 3 bu2w figs-exclusive לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 Here, **our** is exclusive, excluding the non-Jewish hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 4 3 ezs2 figs-possession לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 The Israelites could say that Yahweh is **our God** not in the sense that they possess or control him, but in the sense that they worship him exclusively. Alternate translation: “for the God whom we worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
EZR 4 3 jpin grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּי֩ 1 The word **but** indicates that the clause it introduces draws a contrast between what the men asked and what the Jewish leaders were prepared to allow. To indicate this contrast, you could begin the sentence with a word or phrase such as “no,” “rather,” or “on the contrary.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EZR 4 3 jkgy figs-exclusive אֲנַ֨חְנוּ יַ֜חַד נִבְנֶ֗ה לַֽ⁠יהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 **We ourselves** here does not include the addressees. If your language marks that distinction, be sure that this is clear in your translation. **Together** does not mean the Jewish people and these foreign peoples together. It means the whole Jewish community together. Alternate translation: “it is all of us Israelites who will build a temple for Yahweh, the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ EZR 4 12 tbqv figs-go סְלִ֨קוּ֙ 1 If it is more natural in your langua
EZR 4 12 ns5b עֲלֶ֥י⁠נָא אֲת֖וֹ לִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “have settled near us in Jerusalem”
EZR 4 12 fu8s figs-metonymy קִרְיְתָ֨⁠א מָֽרָדְתָּ֤⁠א ו⁠באישת⁠א 1 the rebellious and evil city Here the officials are describing the inhabitants of Jerusalem figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the **city** where they live. The officials are not saying that the walls and buildings would be rebellious if they were rebuilt. Rather, they are saying that the people who have lived in this city have continually revolted against their foreign rulers. Alternate translation: “that city whose people are constantly rebelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 4 12 kke9 figs-doublet מָֽרָדְתָּ֤⁠א ו⁠באישת⁠א 1 **Rebellious and evil** mean similar things. The officials use them together to emphasize their certainty that, because the people of Jerusalem are so evil or wicked (in this context meaning rebellious against authority), they would revolt against Artaxerxes if they were able to rebuild and fortify their city. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these words into a single expression. Alternate translation: “constantly rebelling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EZR 4 12 jr26 figs-parallelism וְשׁוּרַיָּ֣א שַׁכְלִ֔ילוּ וְ⁠אֻשַּׁיָּ֖⁠א יַחִֽיטוּ 1 repairing the foundations Here, **completing** is a way of saying “building.” Several times in this section of Ezra, the text uses the two words **repairing** and **completing** together to mean <br>“building,” or it uses them as poetic parallels. (For example, “which a great king of Israel built and completed,” [5:11](../05/11.md), and “to build this house and to complete this structure,” [5:3](../05/03.md).) The term **completing** by itself here seems similarly to have the meaning of “building.” **Repairing** here could also mean “digging out.” Either way, this is a reference to preparing foundations so that buildings can be set up on them. So the officials are describing the project of restoring the city by referring to the work on two parallel parts of it, its walls and its buildings. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this without using a similar figure of speech. Alternate translations: “they are working throughout the city to restore it” or “they are rebuilding the walls and preparing foundations for buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 4 12 jr26 figs-parallelism וְשׁוּרַיָּ֣א שַׁכְלִ֔ילוּ וְ⁠אֻשַּׁיָּ֖⁠א יַחִֽיטוּ 1 repairing the foundations Here, **completing** is a way of saying “building.” Several times in this section of Ezra, the text uses the two words **repairing** and **completing** together to mean<br>“building,” or it uses them as poetic parallels. (For example, “which a great king of Israel built and completed,” [5:11](../05/11.md), and “to build this house and to complete this structure,” [5:3](../05/03.md).) The term **completing** by itself here seems similarly to have the meaning of “building.” **Repairing** here could also mean “digging out.” Either way, this is a reference to preparing foundations so that buildings can be set up on them. So the officials are describing the project of restoring the city by referring to the work on two parallel parts of it, its walls and its buildings. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this without using a similar figure of speech. Alternate translations: “they are working throughout the city to restore it” or “they are rebuilding the walls and preparing foundations for buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 4 13 daq3 כְּעַ֗ן 1 The word **now** is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md) and [4:11](../04/11.md). Here, **now** introduces an important point within the letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation.
EZR 4 13 vkk4 figs-123person יְדִ֨יעַ֙ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֔⁠א 1 As in [4:12](../04/12.md), the officials address the king here in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be clearer in your language, you could indicate this respect by using an expression such as “O king.” Alternate translation: “we would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 4 13 cd84 figs-activepassive יְדִ֨יעַ֙ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְ⁠מַלְכָּ֔⁠א 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “we would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ EZR 4 15 mcvp figs-123person דִּ֡י יְבַקַּר֩ 1 Here again the off
EZR 4 15 fujm figs-idiom בִּֽ⁠סְפַר־דָּכְרָ֨נַיָּ֜⁠א דִּ֣י אֲבָהָתָ֗⁠ךְ 1 Although **book** is singular, this expression actually refers to the collection of documents that Artaxerxes possessed that recorded events and decrees from the reigns of earlier kings. He responds in [4:19](../04/19.md) that he had his court officials search in this collection. Verses [6:12](../06/01.md) describe how Darius earlier made a similar search. Alternate translation: “in the royal chronicles” or “in the archives of the previous kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 4 15 u1i3 figs-metaphor בִּֽ⁠סְפַר־דָּכְרָ֨נַיָּ֜⁠א דִּ֣י אֲבָהָתָ֗⁠ךְ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “predecessors.” This would include some who were direct ancestors of Artaxerxes, including his father Ahasuerus (Xerxes) and grandfather Darius. But it also seems to include the Assyrian and Babylonian kings to whose empires the Persian kings were now the heirs. The revolts of Jerusalem that this search discovered, as reported in [4:19](../04/19.md), were against the Babylonians. Indeed, Artaxerxes says that his officials investigated the matter back to ancient days, presumably back to the times of earlier empires. Alternate translation: “the chronicles of previous kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 4 15 zvmc figs-doublet וּ֠⁠תְהַשְׁכַּח בִּ⁠סְפַ֣ר דָּכְרָנַיָּ⁠א֮ וְ⁠תִנְדַּע֒ 1 The words **discover** and **learn** mean similar things. The officials use the two words together to emphasize how certain it is that the chronicles will show that Jerusalem has always been rebellious. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use only one word instead of two. Alternate translation: “The chronicles will certainly confirm for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EZR 4 15 sa9b figs-parallelism דִּי֩ קִרְיְתָ֨⁠א דָ֜ךְ קִרְיָ֣א מָֽרָדָ֗א וּֽ⁠מְהַנְזְקַ֤ת מַלְכִין֙ וּ⁠מְדִנָ֔ן וְ⁠אֶשְׁתַּדּוּר֙ עָבְדִ֣ין בְּ⁠גַוַּ֔⁠הּ מִן־יוֹמָ֖ת עָלְמָ֑⁠א 1 a rebellious city These two phrases mean similar things. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “that the people living in Jerusalem have constantly rebelled against their kings and governors and refused to pay tribute” However, there is a slight difference in meaning. The second phrase intensifies the first phrase, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Alternate translation: “that the people of Jerusalem have rebelled against emperors and governors and refused to pay tribute, long being a center of revolt ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 4 15 sa9b figs-parallelism דִּי֩ קִרְיְתָ֨⁠א דָ֜ךְ קִרְיָ֣א מָֽרָדָ֗א וּֽ⁠מְהַנְזְקַ֤ת מַלְכִין֙ וּ⁠מְדִנָ֔ן וְ⁠אֶשְׁתַּדּוּר֙ עָבְדִ֣ין בְּ⁠גַוַּ֔⁠הּ מִן־יוֹמָ֖ת עָלְמָ֑⁠א 1 a rebellious city These two phrases mean similar things. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “that the people living in Jerusalem have constantly rebelled against their kings and governors and refused to pay tribute” However, there is a slight difference in meaning. The second phrase intensifies the first phrase, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Alternate translation: “that the people of Jerusalem have rebelled against emperors and governors and refused to pay tribute, long being a center of revolt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 4 15 z1fu figs-idiom וּֽ⁠מְהַנְזְקַ֤ת 1 In light of the similar expression in [4:13](../04/13.md), “and the revenue of the kings will suffer harm,” this likely means that the people of Jerusalem have refused to pay tribute to foreign emperors. Alternate translation: “and refused to pay tribute to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 4 15 iw58 figs-metonymy וּ⁠מְדִנָ֔ן 1 Here, **provinces** refers to the rulers of provinces, that is, governors. The officials are describing them figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the jurisdictions that they rule. Alternate translation: “and governors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 4 15 au5i figs-activepassive עַ֨ל־דְּנָ֔ה קִרְיְתָ֥⁠א דָ֖ךְ הָֽחָרְבַֽת 1 this city was destroyed If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Because the people of Jerusalem kept rebelling against them, the Babylonians finally came and destroyed that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ EZR 4 23 v0na figs-explicit וּ⁠בַטִּ֥לוּ הִמּ֖וֹ בְּ⁠א
EZR 4 24 kj9i figs-explicit בֵּ⁠אדַ֗יִן בְּטֵלַת֙ עֲבִידַ֣ת בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בִּ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם 1 the work on the house of God which is in Jerusalem ceased, and it remained stopped until the second year of the reign of Darius The book now returns to the point in the story where it left off at the end of [4:5](../04/05.md). (If it would be helpful, review the note to [4:6](../04/06.md). That note explains how the book tells of later events in [4:623](../04/06.md) to show that the Jews were wise not to trust the Samaritans when they offered to help rebuild the temple during the reign of Cyrus, since they demonstrated by their repeated future opposition that they really were the enemies of the Jews.) It might be useful to include a heading before this verse to alert the reader that there is a change of timeframe at this point, such as, “Building the Temple in the Time of Darius.” Also, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could say something explicitly here that would show how the book is returning to the time of Cyrus and his immediate successors. Alternate translation: “This is how the enemies of the Jews tried, under later kings, to stop them from rebuilding Jerusalem. They attempted the same thing under King Cyrus and his successors and they were able to stop the work on the temple for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 4 24 s03r figs-activepassive וַ⁠הֲוָת֙ בָּֽטְלָ֔א 1 the work on the house of God which is in Jerusalem ceased, and it remained stopped until the second year of the reign of Darius If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the Jews did not start rebuilding again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 4 24 v4gi translate-names דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ 1 the work on the house of God which is in Jerusalem ceased, and it remained stopped until the second year of the reign of Darius **Darius** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 5 intro rn2j 0 # Ezra 05 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter from where it left off in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>The prophets Haggai and Zechariah encouraged the Jews to begin again to build the temple. This was very important to life in Judah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
EZR 5 intro rn2j 0 # Ezra 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter from where it left off in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Rebuilding the temple<br><br>The prophets Haggai and Zechariah encouraged the Jews to begin again to build the temple. This was very important to life in Judah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
EZR 5 1 puq2 writing-newevent וְ⁠הִתְנַבִּ֞י 1 Iddo Here, the word **Then** introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural method in your language to introduce a new event here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EZR 5 1 buty grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְ⁠הִתְנַבִּ֞י 1 Iddo The word **Then** indicates that the event the story will now relate took place at the time just named in [4:24](../04/24.md), that is, in the second year of the reign of Darius as king of Persia. Alternate translation: “At that time … prophesied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EZR 5 1 bdb8 translate-names וּ⁠זְכַרְיָ֤ה בַר־עִדּוֹא֙ 1 Iddo **Zechariah** is the name of a man, and **Iddo** is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ EZR 5 3 a23k figs-parallelism בַּיְתָ֤⁠א דְנָה֙ לִ⁠בְּנ
EZR 5 3 rp2r figs-metaphor בַּיְתָ֤⁠א דְנָה֙ 1 the Province Beyond the River “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 4 jznw grammar-connect-time-sequential אֱדַ֥יִן 1 the Province Beyond the River Here, the word **Then** is indicating that the enemies asked the question in this verse right after the question they asked in the previous verse. (The word is not indicating that the two questions were asked on separate occasions.) Alternate translation: “In addition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EZR 5 4 tp1s translate-textvariants אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א 1 Here, the Aramaic text reads **we said**. The pronoun does not seem to fit the context here, because of the sudden, unexplained shift from third person “they” in verse 3 to first person “we” here. In [5:10](../05/10.md), in their letter to Darius, Tattenai and his associates use “we” when they report that they were the ones who asked this question. So the word “we” could have been mistakenly copied into this verse from that one. Other ancient versions say “they,” and it will likely be clearest for your readers if you translate the phrase in that way. Alternate translation: “they said to them, 'What are the men's names” or “they said to them, 'Who are the men” It is also possible that the verse is not reporting a question in direct speech, but is simply describing what was said as a statement. In that case, **we** would refer to the Jews. Alternate translation: “we told them who the men were” or “we told them the names of the men [who were building this building.”] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
EZR 5 4 4wgj figs-quotations אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א דִּֽי־דְנָ֥ה בִנְיָנָ֖⁠א בָּנַֽיִן 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you can present this sentence as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
EZR 5 4 cwgj figs-quotations אֲמַ֣רְנָא לְּ⁠הֹ֑ם מַן־אִנּוּן֙ שְׁמָהָ֣ת גֻּבְרַיָּ֔⁠א דִּֽי־דְנָ֥ה בִנְיָנָ֖⁠א בָּנַֽיִן 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you can present this sentence as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
EZR 5 5 ewqj grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠עֵ֣ין 1 the Province Beyond the River Here, the word **But** indicates that the sentence it introduces draws a contrast between what Tattenai and his associates were trying to accomplish, which was an immediate end to the rebuilding of the temple, and what actually happened. You could begin the sentence with a word such as “however” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EZR 5 5 gv23 figs-metaphor וְ⁠עֵ֣ין אֱלָהֲ⁠הֹ֗ם הֲוָת֙ עַל־שָׂבֵ֣י יְהוּדָיֵ֔⁠א 1 the eye of God was on Here, **eye** stands for seeing, and in this context, seeing figuratively means giving care, protection, and favor. Alternate translation: “God was making sure that the Jewish leaders would be alright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 5 mvci grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠לָא 1 the eye of God was on Here the word **and** indicates that the clause it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “as a result … not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -542,8 +542,8 @@ EZR 5 11 r5fg figs-explicit אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠אַר
EZR 5 11 a1ui figs-metaphor וּ⁠בָנַ֤יִן בַּיְתָ⁠א֙ 1 that was built many years ago, which a great king of Israel built and completed **House** means the temple. This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying the “house of God,” a figurative description of the temple as the place where God lived. Alternate translation: “and we are rebuilding the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 11 y9hr figs-hendiadys וּ⁠מֶ֤לֶךְ לְ⁠יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ רַ֔ב בְּנָ֖⁠הִי וְ⁠שַׁכְלְלֵֽ⁠הּ 1 completed In this section of the book, **completed** is another way of saying **built** when the two words are used together. (Review the note about this at [4:12](../04/12.md) if that would be helpful.) So the Jewish elders are expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning with a single word. Alternate translation: “which a great king of Israel constructed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EZR 5 12 mnpe grammar-connect-logic-contrast לָהֵ֗ן 1 completed The word **However** indicates that there will be a contrast between the sentence that it introduces and the previous one. This sentence expresses the opposite of what someone would hope and expect to happen after a great king built a temple for God, so you could begin the sentence with a word such as “unfortunately” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EZR 5 12 un5r figs-metaphor מִן־דִּ֨י הַרְגִּ֤זוּ אֲבָהֳתַ֨⁠נָא֙ לֶ⁠אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔⁠א 1 General Information: Here, **fathers** figuratively means ancestors. Alternate translation: “because our ancestors angered the God who rules in heaven” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 12 pqp8 figs-metaphor יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠יַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר 1 provoked the God of heaven to wrath Here, **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “God allowed Nebuchadnezzar to conquer them” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 12 un5r figs-metaphor מִן־דִּ֨י הַרְגִּ֤זוּ אֲבָהֳתַ֨⁠נָא֙ לֶ⁠אֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔⁠א 1 General Information: Here, **fathers** figuratively means ancestors. Alternate translation: “because our ancestors angered the God who rules in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 12 pqp8 figs-metaphor יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠יַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר 1 provoked the God of heaven to wrath Here, **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “God allowed Nebuchadnezzar to conquer them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 5 12 cy4x figs-metonymy יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּ⁠יַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר 1 he gave them into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, the Chaldean, who destroyed this house and deported the people Nebuchadnezzar alone did not conquer the kingdom of Judah. Rather, the elders are describing his armies figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the emperor who commanded them. Alternate translation: “God allowed them to be conquered by the armies of Nebuchadnezzar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 5 12 lfdn translate-names נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר מֶֽלֶךְ־בָּבֶ֖ל 1 he gave them into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, the Chaldean, who destroyed this house and deported the people **Nebuchadnezzar** is the name of a man, and **Babylon** is the name of the empire that he ruled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 5 12 soz8 figs-distinguish כַּסְדָּאָ֑ה 1 he gave them into the hand of Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, the Chaldean, who destroyed this house and deported the people Here the elders provide some further background information about who Nebuchadnezzar was. Even though he was the ruler of the Babylonian Empire, he was not from the Babylonian people group himself, but rather from the Chaldean people group. Alternate translation: “who was from the Chaldean people group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ EZR 5 13 t6xc translate-names לְ⁠כ֥וֹרֶשׁ 1 King Cyrus issued a comm
EZR 5 13 g9o0 figs-explicit מַלְכָּ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל 1 King Cyrus issued a command to rebuild the house of God Cyrus was the king of the Persian Empire, but since under his leadership the Persians had conquered the Babylonians, he also had the right to use the title **king of Babylon**. The implication may be that as the heir and successor to the throne of Babylon, Cyrus had the same power over the temple as Nebuchadnezzar, and so he could order it to be rebuilt. Alternate translation: “who conquered Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 5 14 q6am וְ֠⁠אַף מָאנַיָּ֣⁠א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣⁠ה וְ⁠כַסְפָּ⁠א֒ דִּ֣י נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֗ר הַנְפֵּק֙ מִן־הֵֽיכְלָ⁠א֙ דִּ֣י בִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֔ם וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל הִמּ֔וֹ לְ⁠הֵיכְלָ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל הַנְפֵּ֨ק הִמּ֜וֹ כּ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗⁠א מִן־הֵֽיכְלָ⁠א֙ דִּ֣י בָבֶ֔ל וִ⁠יהִ֨יבוּ֙ לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר 1 General Information: This sentence may be hard for readers to follow because, in it, the direct object (that is, the thing that receives the action) comes first, and it consists of a very long phrase. If it would be clearer in your language, you could break this sentence into two sentences. Alternate translation: “Nebuchadnezzar had taken the gold and silver objects that were used in worship out of the temple in Jerusalem and brought them to the temple in Babylon. King Cyrus took them out of the temple in Babylon and gave them to … Sheshbazzar” See also the UST.
EZR 5 14 ukn9 translate-unknown מָאנַיָּ֣⁠א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָ⁠א֮ 1 General Information: This means specifically the bowls, basins, and other objects listed in [1:910](../01/09.md). These **vessels** were used during worship in the temple. Alternate translation: “the objects that were used in worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EZR 5 14 6rht figs-go וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל 1 General Information: If it is more natural in your language, rather than **had brought**, you could say “had taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
EZR 5 14 drht figs-go וְ⁠הֵיבֵ֣ל 1 General Information: If it is more natural in your language, rather than **had brought**, you could say “had taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
EZR 5 14 qsv0 figs-activepassive וִ⁠יהִ֨יבוּ֙ 1 General Information: If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Cyrus presented them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 5 14 w7ix translate-names לְ⁠שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר 1 Sheshbazzar **Sheshbazzar** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 5 15 kwvp grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠אֲמַר 1 Let the house of God be rebuilt Here, **then** indicates that the event that the elders will now describe came after the events that they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@ -564,8 +564,8 @@ EZR 5 15 ebgs figs-quotesinquotes אֵ֚ל מָֽאנַיָּ֔⁠א שֵׂ֚א
EZR 5 15 q6r3 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָהָ֖⁠א יִתְבְּנֵ֥א עַל־אַתְרֵֽ⁠הּ 1 Let the house of God be rebuilt If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I authorize you to rebuild the temple on its original site” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 5 16 x9zt grammar-connect-time-sequential אֱדַ֨יִן֙ 1 General Information: The elders use the word **then** to indicate that the event they will now describe came after the events they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EZR 5 16 batc שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר דֵּ֔ךְ אֲתָ֗א 1 General Information: The implication is that he came here, that is, from the perspective of the elders who are speaking, he came to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that man named Sheshbazzar came here”
EZR 5 16 54ml figs-explicit יְהַ֧ב אֻשַּׁיָּ֛⁠א 1 General Information: Sheshbazzar did not do the work himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you can refer to others who did the work, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 5 16 iuxm וּ⁠מִן־אֱדַ֧יִן וְ⁠עַד־כְּעַ֛ן מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 General Information: In several places the book uses the terms **built and complete** together to mean “constructed.” (Review the note about this at [5:11](../05/11.md) if that would be helpful.) But this expression means something different here. Because there is a <br>**not** before the second verb, here the expression means that the temple was only partially rebuilt, and then the work was interrupted. Be sure that your translation shows this difference. Alternate translation: “And ever since then, we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it”
EZR 5 16 e4ml figs-explicit יְהַ֧ב אֻשַּׁיָּ֛⁠א 1 General Information: Sheshbazzar did not do the work himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you can refer to others who did the work, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 5 16 iuxm וּ⁠מִן־אֱדַ֧יִן וְ⁠עַד־כְּעַ֛ן מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 General Information: In several places the book uses the terms **built and complete** together to mean “constructed.” (Review the note about this at [5:11](../05/11.md) if that would be helpful.) But this expression means something different here. Because there is a<br>**not** before the second verb, here the expression means that the temple was only partially rebuilt, and then the work was interrupted. Be sure that your translation shows this difference. Alternate translation: “And ever since then, we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it”
EZR 5 16 d7m8 figs-activepassive מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 it has been under construction, but is not complete If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 5 16 myr8 figs-quotemarks וְ⁠לָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 under construction Here the letter ends its quotation of what the Jewish elders told Tattenai and his associates. If you decided in [5:11](../05/11.md) to mark their words as a secondary quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 5 17 f4m4 grammar-connect-words-phrases וּ⁠כְעַ֞ן 1 General Information: As in [4:10](../04/10.md) and [4:11](../04/11.md), **and now** translates an Aramaic expression that introduces the main business of a letter. In this case, it comes near the end of the letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ EZR 5 17 gidq figs-metaphor בְּ⁠בֵ֨ית גִּנְזַיָּ֜⁠א דּ
EZR 5 17 vii9 figs-activepassive הֵ֣ן אִיתַ֗י דִּֽי־מִן־כּ֤וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ⁠א֙ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵ֔ם לְ⁠מִבְנֵ֛א בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֥⁠א דֵ֖ךְ בִּ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם 1 if it is so that a command was issued by King Cyrus If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whether King Cyrus issued a decree to rebuild the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 5 17 fzez figs-123person וּ⁠רְע֥וּת מַלְכָּ֛⁠א עַל־דְּנָ֖ה יִשְׁלַ֥ח עֲלֶֽי⁠נָא 1 if it is so that a command was issued by King Cyrus Tattenai and his associates continue to address the king in third person as a form of respect. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the second person and indicate respect in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Please tell us, O king, what you would like us to do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 5 17 ieh1 figs-quotemarks וּ⁠רְע֥וּת מַלְכָּ֛⁠א עַל־דְּנָ֖ה יִשְׁלַ֥ח עֲלֶֽי⁠נָא 1 if it is so that a command was issued by King Cyrus Here the book ends its quotation of the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius. If you decided in [5:7](../05/07.md) to mark their words as a quotation, you should indicate that by ending the quotation here with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 6 intro y5d8 0 # Ezra 06 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The completion of the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship occurs in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Temple taxes<br><br>The king said that the Jews were right and ordered money from his taxes to be used to help them with their sacrifices.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Darius<br><br>In this chapter, Darius is called the king of Assyria. In reality, besides ruling over the former Assyrian Empire, Darius was also king of Persia. Persia had conquered Babylon, which had previously conquered Assyria. This made the king of Persia to be the king of Assyria as well. It was unusual to refer to Darius as the king or ruler of Assyria. Ezra may have referred to him in this way to contrast Darius actions with those of the former rulers of Assyria, who had treated the Jews very cruelly. Those earlier Assyrian rulers were the ones who had conquered the northern tribes of Israel and deported them to other lands. It was for this reason that the northern tribes lost their identity and were no longer a distinct people group.
EZR 6 intro y5d8 0 # Ezra 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The completion of the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship occurs in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Temple taxes<br><br>The king said that the Jews were right and ordered money from his taxes to be used to help them with their sacrifices.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Darius<br><br>In this chapter, Darius is called the king of Assyria. In reality, besides ruling over the former Assyrian Empire, Darius was also king of Persia. Persia had conquered Babylon, which had previously conquered Assyria. This made the king of Persia to be the king of Assyria as well. It was unusual to refer to Darius as the king or ruler of Assyria. Ezra may have referred to him in this way to contrast Darius actions with those of the former rulers of Assyria, who had treated the Jews very cruelly. Those earlier Assyrian rulers were the ones who had conquered the northern tribes of Israel and deported them to other lands. It was for this reason that the northern tribes lost their identity and were no longer a distinct people group.
EZR 6 1 cmmn grammar-connect-logic-result בֵּ⁠אדַ֛יִן 1 issued a command and a search was made Here, **Then** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 6 1 spf8 figs-explicit דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֖⁠א שָׂ֣ם טְעֵ֑ם וּ⁠בַקַּ֣רוּ 1 issued a command and a search was made The implication is that King Darius ordered his officials to search in the royal archives to investigate the claims that the Jewish elders had made in response to the questions that Tattenai and his associates asked them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Darius commanded his officials to investigate whether King Cyrus had issued a decree to rebuild the temple in Jerusalem by searching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 6 1 pb3s translate-names דָּרְיָ֥וֶשׁ 1 issued a command and a search was made **Darius** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ EZR 6 5 xrzz figs-quotemarks וְ⁠תַחֵ֖ת בְּ⁠בֵ֥ית אֱלָה
EZR 6 6 f9x5 figs-ellipsis כְּעַ֡ן תַּ֠תְּנַי 1 General Information: Here the book leaves out some of the material that a story would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Rather than repeating the same information from the scroll, but now as a letter to the officials, it jumps right from its quotation from the scroll that was discovered at Ecbatana and into the letter that King Darius wrote to Tattenai and his associates in response to what the scroll said. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When King Darius learned from the scroll that Cyrus had ordered the temple to be rebuilt, he sent Tattenai and his associates a letter in answer to their inquiry. He told them what he had learned from the scroll and then warned them, “Now Tattenai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EZR 6 6 ks97 figs-quotemarks כְּעַ֡ן 1 General Information: Since the book here begins to quote the letter that King Darius sent in reply to Tattenai and his associates, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 6 6 wtim grammar-connect-words-phrases כְּעַ֡ן 1 General Information: As in [4:13](../04/13.md), [4:14](../04/14.md), and [4:21](../04/21.md), **now** introduces an important point within a letter. (It is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md), [4:11](../04/11.md), [4:17](../04/17.md), and [5:17](../05/17.md).) If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
EZR 6 6 qpqv figs-123person תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜⁠ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑⁠ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה 1 General Information: Since Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of <br>**their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:1116](../04/11.md), [4:1722](../04/17.md), and [5:717](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients names right to these instructions, if it would be clearer in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 6 6 qpqv figs-123person תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜⁠ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔⁠א דִּ֖י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑⁠ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה 1 General Information: Since Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of<br>**their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:1116](../04/11.md), [4:1722](../04/17.md), and [5:717](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients names right to these instructions, if it would be clearer in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 6 6 xd9g translate-names תַּ֠תְּנַי…שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ 1 Tattenai … Shethar-Bozenai These are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 6 6 xk9x וּ⁠כְנָוָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן 1 the Province Beyond the River Alternate translation: “and their associates” or “and your associates”
EZR 6 6 akg1 figs-metaphor רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה 1 the Province Beyond the River King Darius uses a spatial metaphor to indicate figuratively that he wants Tattenai and his associates not to interfere with what the Jews are doing in Jerusalem. The meaning is not simply that they are to stay away physically from that area, since they could still plot against the Jews from a distance (for example, by bribing officials in the royal court, as [4:5](../04/05.md) describes). Alternate translation: “do not interfere with what is happening in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -640,9 +640,9 @@ EZR 6 11 w334 figs-metaphor וּ⁠בַיְתֵ֛⁠הּ נְוָל֥וּ יִת
EZR 6 11 i9yf figs-activepassive יִתְנְסַ֥ח אָע֙ מִן־בַּיְתֵ֔⁠הּ 1 impaled If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “you must pull a beam out of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 6 11 ivvc figs-activepassive וּ⁠זְקִ֖יף יִתְמְחֵ֣א 1 impaled If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “then you must set the beam upright and impale him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 6 11 a7ih figs-activepassive וּ⁠בַיְתֵ֛⁠הּ נְוָל֥וּ יִתְעֲבֵ֖ד 1 impaled If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “And you must turn his house into a rubbish heap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 6 12 18u8 וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy This is a curse formula. In addition to the threat of severe punishment in the previous verse, here Darius adds a curse from God to anyone who would disobey his order. Use a curse formula that is natural in your language.
EZR 6 12 f8u8 וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy This is a curse formula. In addition to the threat of severe punishment in the previous verse, here Darius adds a curse from God to anyone who would disobey his order. Use a curse formula that is natural in your language.
EZR 6 12 eirc figs-personification וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy Darius speaks of Gods **name** here as if it were capable of living in a place. The phrase echoes Jewish usage, which Darius may be following deliberately to show his respect for the God whose temple he wants to be rebuilt. The phrase indicates that Jerusalem is the place from which God chose to start making himself known throughout the world. Alternate translation: “And may the God who began to make himself known from Jerusalem destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EZR 6 12 bajr figs-metonymy וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. In this figure, a person's fame is described by something associated with it, which is how well known their name is and how people react to hearing it. Alternate translation: “And may the God who began to make himself known from Jerusalem destroy” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 6 12 bajr figs-metonymy וֵֽ⁠אלָהָ֞⁠א דִּ֣י שַׁכִּ֧ן שְׁמֵ֣⁠הּ תַּמָּ֗ה יְמַגַּ֞ר 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. In this figure, a person's fame is described by something associated with it, which is how well known their name is and how people react to hearing it. Alternate translation: “And may the God who began to make himself known from Jerusalem destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 6 12 jqt7 figs-idiom יְמַגַּ֞ר 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy This is an idiom that means “destroy.” Alternate translation: “may … destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 6 12 e5ta figs-idiom כָּל־מֶ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם֙ דִּ֣י ׀ יִשְׁלַ֣ח יְדֵ֗⁠הּ 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy Here the expression “who stretches out his hand” means to seek to do harm. Alternate translation: “any king or people who, with harmful intent, attempts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 6 12 mn8y figs-ellipsis לְ⁠הַשְׁנָיָ֛ה לְ⁠חַבָּלָ֛ה בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֥⁠א דֵ֖ךְ 1 who extends their hand to change it, or to destroy This could mean one of two things. (1) It could mean that no one is to try to **change** the decree of Darius, in the sense of disobeying or defying, as in the previous verse, so that they can **destroy** the temple rather than ensure that it is rebuilt. In that case, this letter would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “to disobey my decree and destroy that temple” or (2) It could mean that no one is to alter or destroy the temple. Alternate translation: “to alter the design of that temple or destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ EZR 6 17 j5b6 figs-idiom וּ⁠צְפִירֵ֨י עִזִּ֜ין 1 one hundre
EZR 6 17 quwd figs-explicit וּ⁠צְפִירֵ֨י עִזִּ֜ין…תְּרֵֽי־עֲשַׂ֔ר לְ⁠מִנְיָ֖ן שִׁבְטֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 one hundred bulls … four hundred lambs The book assumes that readers will know that there were twelve tribes in Israel, so the twelve goats could symbolically represent the entire nation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “12 male goats … one for each of the 12 tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 6 18 r0gx grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ 1 to their divisions Here the word **And** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a word such as “Then.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EZR 6 18 zkjf figs-metaphor וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א…וְ⁠לֵוָיֵ⁠א֙ 1 to their divisions Here, **stand** is a figurative way of saying that a person has assumed the duties of their office. So to cause someone to stand is to appoint them to those duties and install them in that office. Alternate translation: “And they appointed the priests … and the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 6 18 3zxp writing-pronouns וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א 1 to their divisions Here, **they** refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “And the leaders of the Jews appointed the priests” or “Then the Jewish elders established the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
EZR 6 18 gzxp writing-pronouns וַ⁠הֲקִ֨ימוּ כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א 1 to their divisions Here, **they** refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “And the leaders of the Jews appointed the priests” or “Then the Jewish elders established the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
EZR 6 18 iix1 figs-explicit כָהֲנַיָּ֜⁠א בִּ⁠פְלֻגָּתְ⁠ה֗וֹן וְ⁠לֵוָיֵ⁠א֙ בְּ⁠מַחְלְקָ֣תְ⁠ה֔וֹן 1 to their divisions The book assumes that readers will know that these **divisions** and **sections** were groups of priests and Levites, respectively, that served in the temple for a week at a time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They appointed the priests and the Levites to groups that would serve in the temple for a week at a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 6 18 ba06 figs-metaphor עַל־עֲבִידַ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠א דִּ֣י בִ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם 1 to their divisions Here the book describes God in a spatial metaphor as if he lived in the city of Jerusalem. This is a figurative reference to the way Gods presence was in the temple in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to lead the worship of God in the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 6 18 vt19 כִּ⁠כְתָ֖ב סְפַ֥ר מֹשֶֽׁה 1 to their divisions Alternate translation: “as it is written in the book of Moses” or “as God commanded in the law of Moses”
@ -716,11 +716,11 @@ EZR 6 22 p2re grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֧וּ חַג
EZR 6 22 k6q8 figs-metaphor וְֽ⁠הֵסֵ֞ב לֵ֤ב מֶֽלֶךְ־אַשּׁוּר֙ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 turned the heart of the king of Assyria Here, **the heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and the will. Turning the kings heart towards the Jews figuratively means that Yahweh made him think and feel differently about the Jews. Alternate translation: “and made King Darius of Persia favorable toward the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 6 22 x9ls מֶֽלֶךְ־אַשּׁוּר֙ 1 to strengthen their hands in the work of the house of God This phrase actually refers to Darius, the king of Persia. But since the Persian Empire was the heir to the Assyrian Empire, Darius could be addressed by this title as well. (See the note to [4:15](../04/15.md) that explains that the Persian kings considered their “fathers” or predecessor kings to include the Assyrian and Babylonian kings whose empires they had absorbed.) Alternate translation: “King Darius of Persia”
EZR 6 22 m7l7 figs-distinguish אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 the work of the house of God As in [4:1](../04/01.md), this phrase provides further background information about who Yahweh is. In context, it helps distinguish Yahweh from the gods of the nations of the land. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EZR 7 intro p3he 0 # Ezra 07 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Possible title: Ezra begins his religious reforms<br><br>### Ezra's geneology<br><br>Ezras genealogy in [7:15](../07/01.md) traces Ezra back to Aaron in a list of 16 ancestors. As is common in ancient genealogies, this list almost certainly does not include all of the generations between Aaron and Ezra. Aaron ([7:5](../07/05.md)) was the first high priest under the law of Moses and the first to serve in the tabernacle. Azariah ([7:3](../07/03.md)) was the first high priest to serve in the temple that Solomon built, which this book describes in [5:11](../05/11.md). Seraiah was the last high priest to serve in that temple. The Babylonians executed him when they conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple. The names in the list are arranged so that there will be seven generations between Aaron and Azariah, and seven generations between Azariah and Ezra, with Seraiah listed as the last generation before Ezra. If you have the freedom to use formatting creatively in your translation, you could make the implicit information about Aaron, Azariah, and Seraiah explicit and format this genealogy in a way that will highlight its purpose and design. Alternate translation and formatting for verse 1 through the first 2 words of verse 6:<br><br>Ezra—<br><br>the descendant of Seraiah, the last high priest in Solomons temple,<br>the son of Azariah,<br>the son of Hilkiah,<br>the son of Shallum,<br>the son of Zadok,<br>the descendant of Ahitub,<br>the descendant of Amariah,<br><br>the son of Azariah, the first high priest in Solomons temple,<br><br>the descendant of Meraioth,<br>the son of Zerahiah,<br>the son of Uzzi,<br>the son of Bukki,<br>the son of Abishua,<br>the son of Phinehas,<br>the son of Eleazar,<br><br>the son of Aaron, the first high priest in the tabernacle<br><br>—this Ezra<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gods Law<br><br>The people no longer know the law of Moses. Therefore, the king allows Ezra to return to Judea to teach the people about Gods law. Many people go with him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
EZR 7 intro p3he 0 # Ezra 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Possible title: Ezra begins his religious reforms<br><br>### Ezra's geneology<br><br>Ezras genealogy in [7:15](../07/01.md) traces Ezra back to Aaron in a list of 16 ancestors. As is common in ancient genealogies, this list almost certainly does not include all of the generations between Aaron and Ezra. Aaron ([7:5](../07/05.md)) was the first high priest under the law of Moses and the first to serve in the tabernacle. Azariah ([7:3](../07/03.md)) was the first high priest to serve in the temple that Solomon built, which this book describes in [5:11](../05/11.md). Seraiah was the last high priest to serve in that temple. The Babylonians executed him when they conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple. The names in the list are arranged so that there will be seven generations between Aaron and Azariah, and seven generations between Azariah and Ezra, with Seraiah listed as the last generation before Ezra. If you have the freedom to use formatting creatively in your translation, you could make the implicit information about Aaron, Azariah, and Seraiah explicit and format this genealogy in a way that will highlight its purpose and design. Alternate translation and formatting for verse 1 through the first 2 words of verse 6:<br><br>Ezra—<br><br>the descendant of Seraiah, the last high priest in Solomons temple,<br>the son of Azariah,<br>the son of Hilkiah,<br>the son of Shallum,<br>the son of Zadok,<br>the descendant of Ahitub,<br>the descendant of Amariah,<br><br>the son of Azariah, the first high priest in Solomons temple,<br><br>the descendant of Meraioth,<br>the son of Zerahiah,<br>the son of Uzzi,<br>the son of Bukki,<br>the son of Abishua,<br>the son of Phinehas,<br>the son of Eleazar,<br><br>the son of Aaron, the first high priest in the tabernacle<br><br>—this Ezra<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gods Law<br><br>The people no longer know the law of Moses. Therefore, the king allows Ezra to return to Judea to teach the people about Gods law. Many people go with him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
EZR 7 1 h549 writing-newevent וְ⁠אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 General Information: This phrase, common in Hebrew storytelling, indicates that the book will now relate events that occurred some time after the events that it had been describing. The book had been describing the time when the Jews finished rebuilding the temple, [6:15](../06/15.md), which was the sixth year of the reign of Darius. Now it will describe events beginning during the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes, who was the grandson of Darius. So nearly sixty years went by between the end of chapter 6 and the beginning of chapter 7. If your language has a similar phrase that can indicate the passage of time like this, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EZR 7 1 qol2 translate-names אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֣סְתְּא 1 General Information: **Artaxerxes** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:7](../04/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 7 1 u6xs translate-names עֶזְרָא֙ 1 General Information: **Ezra** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 7 1 2ixh writing-participants עֶזְרָא֙ 1 General Information: Here the book introduces a new, important person. Use a natural way in your language to do this. Also, since the sentence that begins here extends through verse 6, it may be clearer to make this first part of verse 1 into a complete sentence and begin another sentence with the list of Ezra's ancestors, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EZR 7 1 hixh writing-participants עֶזְרָא֙ 1 General Information: Here the book introduces a new, important person. Use a natural way in your language to do this. Also, since the sentence that begins here extends through verse 6, it may be clearer to make this first part of verse 1 into a complete sentence and begin another sentence with the list of Ezra's ancestors, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EZR 7 1 n9di figs-metaphor בֶּן־שְׂרָיָ֔ה בֶּן־עֲזַרְיָ֖ה בֶּן־חִלְקִיָּֽה 1 Seraiah In general, in the list in [7:15](../07/01.md), **son** figuratively means descendant. However, in many cases a man actually is the biological son of the next man on the list. So for your translation, you will need to decide whether to use the figurative expression **son**, which can also be literally true in many cases, or the non-figurative expression “descendant,” which is true in every case, or to say “son” for actual sons and “descendant” for descendants who are not actual sons. Choosing that last option would help to show that the men on the list have been selected to make a certain number and arrangement, as explained in the chapter introduction. Alternative translations will illustrate this last option for each verse. Here, Alternate translation: “the descendant of Seraiah, the son of Azariah, the son of Hilkiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 1 gcr6 translate-names שְׂרָיָ֔ה…עֲזַרְיָ֖ה…חִלְקִיָּֽה 1 Azariah … Hilkiah These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 7 2 iy78 בֶּן־שַׁלּ֥וּם בֶּן־צָד֖וֹק בֶּן־אֲחִיטֽוּב 1 Shallum Alternate translation: “the son of Shallum, the son of Zadok, the descendant of Ahitub”
@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ EZR 7 7 szwv figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֖ים 1 in the seventh
EZR 7 7 u61a figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּֽעֲל֣וּ…אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 in the seventh year of King Artaxerxes The book says **went up** because these people had to travel from a river valley up into the mountains in order to return from their places of exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 7 7 wz8c figs-go וַ⁠יַּֽעֲל֣וּ…אֶל־יְרוּשָׁלִָ֑ם 1 in the seventh year of King Artaxerxes If it is more natural in your language, you can say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
EZR 7 7 tt66 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 in the seventh year of King Artaxerxes The Hebrew uses a cardinal number here, **seven**, but there is not a significant difference in meaning between that and the way the Hebrew uses an ordinal number, **seventh**, in similar contexts elsewhere. If your language customarily uses ordinals for the numbers of years, you can do that here in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes as king of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EZR 7 8 8r10 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥א יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם 1 the fifth month Here, **he** refers to Ezra, but the statement also applies to all the others described in [7:7](../07/07.md) who were traveling with him. Alternate translation: “And they all arrived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
EZR 7 8 jr10 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥א יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם 1 the fifth month Here, **he** refers to Ezra, but the statement also applies to all the others described in [7:7](../07/07.md) who were traveling with him. Alternate translation: “And they all arrived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
EZR 7 8 cr7y translate-hebrewmonths וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥א יְרוּשָׁלִַ֖ם בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֑י 1 the fifth month The **fifth month** means the fifth month in the Jewish calendar. You could convert the Hebrew month into an equivalent on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the equivalency will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to use the name or number of the Hebrew month. Alternate translation: “And they all arrived in Jerusalem during the fifth month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EZR 7 8 vee2 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠חֲמִישִׁ֑י 1 the fifth month Alternate translation: “in month five” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EZR 7 8 co12 translate-ordinal הִ֛יא שְׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖ית לַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the fifth month Alternate translation: “in year seven of the reign of Artaxerxes,” or, since the year was mentioned at the end of the previous verse, “of that year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
@ -777,12 +777,12 @@ EZR 7 12 al0q גְּמִ֖יר 1 Artaxerxes, king of kings As in [4:17](../04/1
EZR 7 12 bf52 grammar-connect-words-phrases וּ⁠כְעֶֽנֶת 1 Artaxerxes, king of kings **And now** is an Aramaic expression that was used in the letters of this time to introduce the main business of the letter. If it would be helpful, review the note about this expression at [4:10](../04/10.md). If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])<br>
EZR 7 13 d9b4 figs-activepassive מִנִּ⁠י֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ דִּ֣י 1 I am issuing a decree that all those … who desire to go up to Jerusalem If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I am issuing a decree that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 7 13 wi2u figs-you עִמָּ֖⁠ךְ 1 may go with you The king is addressing Ezra, so **you** is singular and refers to Ezra here, and **you** and **your** similarly refer to him in all of their other occurrences through [7:20](../07/20.md). If your language distinguishes between forms of you, the form for a superior addressing a respected individual would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 13 g0ml מִן־עַמָּ֨⁠ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 may go with you Here Artaxerxes specifies that **Israel** is the name of Ezras people group, perhaps because he does not expect everyone who sees this letter to be familiar with them already. Alternate translation: “from the people known as Israel” or <br>“from your people who are called Israel
EZR 7 13 g0ml מִן־עַמָּ֨⁠ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 may go with you Here Artaxerxes specifies that **Israel** is the name of Ezras people group, perhaps because he does not expect everyone who sees this letter to be familiar with them already. Alternate translation: “from the people known as Israel” or<br>“from your people who are called Israel
EZR 7 14 ahgx grammar-connect-logic-result כָּ⁠ל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ דִּ֥י בִ⁠ידָֽ⁠ךְ 1 Connecting Statement: Verses [7:1417](../07/14.md) are one long sentence in Aramaic. The first part ([7:1416](../07/14.md)) provides the reasons for the second part (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could break up that sentence into several smaller sentences. To begin with, you could make this verse a sentence of its own. To do that, you can leave off the word **Because** and express the meaning later in verse 17 with a word such as "so" or "therefore." Alternate translation: “The king and his seven counselors are sending you to inquire about Judah and about Jerusalem by the law of your God which is in your hand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 7 14 cbf2 grammar-connect-logic-result כָּ⁠ל־קֳבֵ֗ל דִּי֩ 1 Connecting Statement: The word **Because** indicates that in the long sentence that follows, the next several phrases ([7:1416](../07/14.md)) will provide the reasons for what the final two phrases say (in [7:17](../07/17.md)). If you have decided to keep the long sentence, you can translate this first word with the word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. However, also consider breaking up this long sentence if that would make things clearer for your readers. Alternate translation: “Since” or “In view of the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 7 14 h7cx figs-activepassive מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 7 14 cx02 figs-123person מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors Artaxerxes speaks of himself here in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 7 14 tpvw figs-metaphor מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors This could mean literally that Ezra has been in the kings presence, that is, in his court, and that the king is sending him out from there. This phrase would show anyone who read the letter that Ezra was an important figure in the royal court. The phrase could also be a spatial metaphor indicating that Ezra is going out on the kings behalf and with his authority. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you from my court” or “I and my seven counselors are<br> sending you with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 14 tpvw figs-metaphor מִן־קֳדָ֨ם מַלְכָּ֜⁠א וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ שְׁלִ֔יחַ 1 the king, and his seven counselors This could mean literally that Ezra has been in the kings presence, that is, in his court, and that the king is sending him out from there. This phrase would show anyone who read the letter that Ezra was an important figure in the royal court. The phrase could also be a spatial metaphor indicating that Ezra is going out on the kings behalf and with his authority. Alternate translation: “I and my seven counselors are sending you from my court” or “I and my seven counselors are<br>sending you with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 14 u9he translate-unknown וְ⁠שִׁבְעַ֤ת יָעֲטֹ֨⁠הִי֙ 1 the king, and his seven counselors As in [4:5](../04/05.md), **counselors** means royal advisors in the Persian court. The seven mentioned here appear to have been the kings closest and most important advisors. Alternate translation: “and his seven chief royal advisors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EZR 7 14 dnqr figs-metonymy לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ 1 the king, and his seven counselors Artaxerxes is describing the Jews who are in the province of Judah, and especially its capital city of Jerusalem, figuratively, by reference to things that are associated with them, the province and city where they live. Alternate translation: “to see how carefully the Jews living in the province of Judah and the city of Jerusalem are following the law of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 7 14 v44t figs-explicit לְ⁠בַקָּרָ֥א עַל־יְה֖וּד וְ⁠לִֽ⁠ירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם בְּ⁠דָ֥ת אֱלָהָ֖⁠ךְ 1 to inquire concerning Judah and Jerusalem according to the law of your God The implication, particularly in light of the powers that the king gives Ezra at the end of the letter ([7:2526](../07/25.md)), is that **inquire** means more than just to find out about. It also implies to do something about. Alternate translation: “to make sure that the Jews living in the province of Judah and the city of Jerusalem follow the law of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ EZR 7 17 ciw6 figs-explicit בְּ⁠כַסְפָּ֣⁠א דְנָ֗ה 1 Connec
EZR 7 17 b2sq figs-explicit אָסְפַּ֨רְנָא תִקְנֵ֜א…תּוֹרִ֤ין ׀ דִּכְרִין֙ אִמְּרִ֔ין וּ⁠מִנְחָתְ⁠ה֖וֹן וְ⁠נִסְכֵּי⁠ה֑וֹן 1 diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings The implication, as [6:9](../06/09.md) indicates explicitly, is that the bulls, rams, and lambs were to be used for whole burnt offerings. If it would be helpful, review the note to [3:2](../03/02.md) about what whole burnt offerings were and why they were offered. The book also expects readers to know that the law of Moses said that two further things should be offered together with the animals that were sacrificed in whole burnt offerings. One was a certain amount of flour mixed with oil, considered a **grain offering**. The other was a certain amount of wine, considered a **drink offering**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “be sure to buy bulls, rams, and lambs to sacrifice as whole burnt offerings, and grain, oil, and wine for the grain offerings and drink offerings that the law says must accompany them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 7 17 sjnr אָסְפַּ֨רְנָא 1 diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings In their decrees, as several examples in this book show, the Persian kings used this term **diligently** to mean carefully, exactly, and efficiently. Review the note to [5:8](../05/08.md) about this term if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “be sure that”
EZR 7 17 vb7p figs-you תִקְנֵ֜א בְּ⁠כַסְפָּ֣⁠א דְנָ֗ה 1 diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings The word **you** here is singular, referring to Ezra. However, Ezra may not have made these purchases himself. Alternate translation: “make sure that your people use this money to buy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 17 5f7h figs-you וּ⁠תְקָרֵ֣ב 1 diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings The word **you** here is singular, referring to Ezra. However, Ezra probably did not offer these sacrifices himself. Alternate translation: “and make sure that the priests offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 17 kf7h figs-you וּ⁠תְקָרֵ֣ב 1 diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings The word **you** here is singular, referring to Ezra. However, Ezra probably did not offer these sacrifices himself. Alternate translation: “and make sure that the priests offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 17 gnt1 figs-you אֱלָהֲ⁠כֹ֖ם 1 diligently buy bulls, rams, lambs, and grain offerings and drink offerings The word **your** here is plural, referring to all of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 18 a2bh figs-metaphor וּ⁠מָ֣ה דִי֩ עלי⁠ך וְ⁠עַל־אחי⁠ך יֵיטַ֗ב בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר כַּסְפָּ֥⁠א וְ⁠דַהֲבָ֖⁠ה לְ⁠מֶעְבַּ֑ד כִּ⁠רְע֥וּת אֱלָהֲ⁠כֹ֖ם תַּעַבְדֽוּן 1 you and your brothers Here, **brother** is a figurative way of saying “fellow Israelites,” and in context it likely refers to the other Jewish leaders who would decide with Ezra what to do with the extra money. Alternate translation: “You and your fellow Jewish leaders can decide what you think your God would like you to do with any silver and gold that is left over.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 18 cq55 figs-you תַּעַבְדֽוּן 1 you and your brothers The word **you** here is plural, referring to Ezra and the other Jewish leaders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -809,14 +809,14 @@ EZR 7 18 pcdz figs-you עלי⁠ך וְ⁠עַל־אחי⁠ך 1 you and your bro
EZR 7 18 zufe figs-you אֱלָהֲ⁠כֹ֖ם 1 you and your brothers The word **your** here is plural, referring to all of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 19 h5qf grammar-connect-words-phrases וּ⁠מָֽאנַיָּ⁠א֙ 1 Connecting Statement: This sentence may be introducing a contrast between what Ezra and the other Jewish leaders could do with gold and silver that people contributed in the form of money and what they had to do with gold and silver that people contributed in the form of bowls and other objects that could be used in the temple. You could begin the sentence with a word such as “however” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
EZR 7 19 h6x1 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָֽאנַיָּ⁠א֙ דִּֽי־מִתְיַהֲבִ֣ין לָ֔⁠ךְ לְ⁠פָלְחָ֖ן בֵּ֣ית אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ הַשְׁלֵ֕ם קֳדָ֖ם אֱלָ֥הּ יְרוּשְׁלֶֽם 1 the objects that were given to you As in [1:7](../01/07.md), **vessels** refers to bowls, basins, and other objects that could be used in worship in the temple. The ones that people contributed on this occasion are described in more detail in [8:2627](../08/26.md). The implication in what the king says here is that Ezra and the Jewish leaders are not to sell or melt down these objects and use the proceeds to pay for temple expenses. Rather, they must use these objects only for temple worship. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not use objects that people contribute for use in the temple of your God to pay for the temple expenses. Make sure that you deliver every one of them to Jerusalem, where they can be used in Gods presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 7 19 4d7a figs-you לָ֔⁠ךְ…אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ 1 the objects that were given to you Here, **you** and **your** are singular, referring to Ezra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 19 md7a figs-you לָ֔⁠ךְ…אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ 1 the objects that were given to you Here, **you** and **your** are singular, referring to Ezra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 19 yho1 figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠פָלְחָ֖ן בֵּ֣ית אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ 1 the objects that were given to you The idea behind the abstract noun **service** can be expressed with a verb such as “use.” Alternate translation: “to use in the temple of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 7 19 bkk8 figs-idiom הַשְׁלֵ֕ם 1 deliver in full before the God of Jerusalem The Aramaic expression translated here as **deliver in full** means to “make complete.” It is the same one that the Jewish leaders use in [5:16](../05/16.md) when they say that the temple is not “finished” yet. In context it means that Ezra must be sure to deliver every single one of the contributed objects to the temple, so that the complete set that was donated will be reassembled there. (We see him doing this carefully in [8:2627](../08/26.md)). Alternate translation: “make sure that you deliver every one of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 7 19 a3tf figs-metaphor קֳדָ֖ם אֱלָ֥הּ יְרוּשְׁלֶֽם 1 for the service of the house of your God Using a spatial metaphor, Artaxerxes says that Ezra must place the objects **before** God, figuratively meaning in Gods presence. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, where they can be used in Gods presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 19 wsrv figs-metaphor קֳדָ֖ם אֱלָ֥הּ יְרוּשְׁלֶֽם 1 for the service of the house of your God As in [6:18](../06/18.md), in another spatial metaphor, Artaxerxes describes God as if he lived in the city of Jerusalem. This is a figurative reference to the way Gods presence was in the temple in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem, where they can be used in Gods presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 20 tytf figs-idiom וּ⁠שְׁאָ֗ר חַשְׁחוּת֙ בֵּ֣ית אֱלָהָ֔⁠ךְ דִּ֥י יִפֶּל־לָ֖⁠ךְ לְ⁠מִנְתַּ֑ן 1 treasury The phrase **that falls to you to give** is an idiom that means “that you have responsibility to give,” in other words, “that you have to provide.” Alternate translation: “And anything else that you need to provide for the temple of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 7 20 ef6f figs-activepassive חַשְׁחוּת֙ 1 treasury If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whatever you might need for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 7 20 xcus figs-you אֱלָהָ֔⁠ךְ…לָ֖⁠ךְ…תִּנְתֵּ֕ן 1 treasury All of the forms of **you** in this verse are singular, referring to Ezra. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 20 xcus figs-you אֱלָהָ֔⁠ךְ…לָ֖⁠ךְ…תִּנְתֵּ֕ן 1 treasury All of the forms of **you** in this verse are singular, referring to Ezra.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 20 gshw figs-synecdoche תִּנְתֵּ֕ן מִן־בֵּ֖ית גִּנְזֵ֥י מַלְכָּֽ⁠א 1 treasury This does not mean, as in [5:17](../05/17.md), the place where valuable royal documents were stored. Here, **house** likely represents all of the wealth of the king figuratively. It is a metaphor for “property,” meaning everything that a person keeps in his house, and by extension everything that he owns. So it is not necessarily a physical building, but it refers in general to all the financial resources that belong to the king, as with the shorter expression **the treasures of the king** in [6:8](../06/08.md). Alternate translation: “you may pay for from my royal treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EZR 7 20 hgu9 figs-123person בֵּ֖ית גִּנְזֵ֥י מַלְכָּֽ⁠א 1 treasury Artaxerxes speaks of himself here in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “my royal treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 7 21 wiy2 grammar-connect-logic-result וּ֠⁠מִנִּ⁠י 1 Connecting Statement: This phrase indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Specifically, Artaxerxes has just said that Ezra may pay for additional expenses out of the royal treasury. Consequently, regarding providing funds to Ezra, he will now give instructions to the officials responsible for administering the royal revenue in the province where Jerusalem is located. Alternate translation: “Consequently, from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ EZR 7 24 gonv תָרָֽעַיָּ⁠א֙ 1 musicians This is the same occupati
EZR 7 24 nk0a translate-names נְתִ֣ינַיָּ֔⁠א 1 musicians See how you translated this term in [2:43](../02/43.md). Review the explanation in the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 7 25 r244 figs-you וְ⁠אַ֣נְתְּ עֶזְרָ֗א 1 Connecting Statement: The king now returns to address Ezra personally, so **you** refers to him here, and is singular, The three instances of **your** in this verse are also singular, as is the verb **appoint**. Only the phrase **you shall teach** is plural, referring to Ezra and to those whom he will appoint. If your language distinguishes between levels of social status, the form for a superior addressing a respected individual would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
EZR 7 25 p1rc figs-abstractnouns כְּ⁠חָכְמַ֨ת אֱלָהָ֤⁠ךְ דִּֽי־בִ⁠ידָ⁠ךְ֙ 1 according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates If your language does not use abstract nouns such as **wisdom**, you can express that idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “because the law of your God has made you wise” or “guided by the wise teachings of your God that you know so well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 7 25 qzk1 figs-metaphor דִּֽי־בִ⁠ידָ⁠ךְ֙ 1 according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates Most likely, the phrase **that is in your hand** here means the same thing as in [7:14](../07/14.md), where the law of God is described as being in Ezra's hand. <br>Review the note there if that would be helpful. As there, the phrase **in your hand** here could mean: (1) that Ezra knows it and uses it with great ability. Alternate translation: “that you know and use well” or (2) that Ezra personally owns a scroll of God's wisdom. Alternate translation: “that you have with you” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 25 qzk1 figs-metaphor דִּֽי־בִ⁠ידָ⁠ךְ֙ 1 according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates Most likely, the phrase **that is in your hand** here means the same thing as in [7:14](../07/14.md), where the law of God is described as being in Ezra's hand.<br>Review the note there if that would be helpful. As there, the phrase **in your hand** here could mean: (1) that Ezra knows it and uses it with great ability. Alternate translation: “that you know and use well” or (2) that Ezra personally owns a scroll of God's wisdom. Alternate translation: “that you have with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 25 y54v figs-doublet מֶ֣נִּי שָׁפְטִ֞ין וְ⁠דַיָּנִ֗ין דִּי־לֶהֱוֺ֤ן דאנין 1 according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates The terms **magistrates** and **judges** mean very similar things. There are two possibilities here. (1) Artaxerxes could be using these two terms to refer to people in slightly different roles. The first term may refer to officials who decide disputes between people, and the second term may refer to officials who interpret the law and apply it to specific situations. Alternate translation: “appoint officials who can decide disputes between people and officials who can interpret and apply the law” or (2) Artaxerxes may be using the two words together to emphasize the authority that Ezra has to ensure that the Jews in Judah and Jerusalem follow Gods commandments. If you have only one term for these functions, you can just use that one term here. Alternate translation: “appoint judges so that they can judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EZR 7 25 waab figs-explicit לְ⁠כָל־עַמָּ⁠ה֙ דִּ֚י בַּ⁠עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֔⁠ה לְ⁠כָל־יָדְעֵ֖י דָּתֵ֣י אֱלָהָ֑⁠ךְ 1 according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates The second phrase clarifies the meaning of the first phrase, showing that Artaxerxes is referring specifically to the Jews who live in this province. He is allowing the Jews there to have their own legal system, based on the law of Moses. If it would be clearer in your language, you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the Jews living in Beyond-the-River province, who know the laws of your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 7 25 nncp figs-you וְ⁠דִ֧י לָ֦א יָדַ֖ע תְּהוֹדְעֽוּן 1 according to the wisdom of God that is in your hand, appoint judges and magistrates The word **you** here is plural. If your language distinguishes between forms of you, the form for a superior addressing a group of people would be appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ EZR 7 26 rz8o figs-quotemarks וְ⁠לֶ⁠אֱסוּרִֽין 1 whether death
EZR 7 27 qh6m writing-participants בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבוֹתֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 Connecting Statement: Previously in the book, Ezra has been a character in a story that someone else has been telling. Here he becomes the person telling the story, and he continues to tell it through to the end of chapter 9. In effect, the letter of introduction that King Artaxerxes wrote for him has been his introduction to us as well. The book does not say specifically that Ezra will now be the narrator, although one indication is that when Ezra is telling the story, he refers to himself as “I” and to the Jewish community as “us,” and another indication is that the book is now written in Hebrew again. But if it would be helpful to your readers, you could add a phrase to indicate this. Alternate translation: “When I, Ezra, received this letter from the king, I prayed, Thank you, Yahweh, the God of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EZR 7 27 yfls figs-aside בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבוֹתֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 Connecting Statement: The first thing that Ezra does when he begins to tell his own story is pray to God, rather than address the audience that will hear his story. If you decided to add a phrase to introduce him as the new narrator, you could use that same phrase to introduce this prayer as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “When I, Ezra, received this letter from the king, I prayed, Thank you, Yahweh, the God of our ancestors” Otherwise, you could show that this prayer is distinct from the story by setting it off with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. The quotation should end in the middle of [7:28](../07/28.md), after “the mighty officials of the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
EZR 7 27 qub7 figs-123person בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה 1 Connecting Statement: Although Ezra speaks of Yahweh in the third person here, he is actually praying a prayer of thanksgiving to Yahweh. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words in the second person. Alternate translation: “Thank you, Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 7 27 9uli בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה 1 Connecting Statement: If it is not natural or not possible in your language to speak of a human blessing God, then you can express the idea here in a different way. Alternate translation: “I praise Yahweh” or “I thank Yahweh”
EZR 7 27 nuli בָּר֥וּךְ יְהוָ֖ה 1 Connecting Statement: If it is not natural or not possible in your language to speak of a human blessing God, then you can express the idea here in a different way. Alternate translation: “I praise Yahweh” or “I thank Yahweh”
EZR 7 27 nlii figs-metaphor אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבוֹתֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 Connecting Statement: **Fathers** here figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 27 t4cz figs-metaphor נָתַ֤ן כָּ⁠זֹאת֙ בְּ⁠לֵ֣ב הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לְ⁠פָאֵ֕ר אֶת־בֵּ֥ית יְהוָ֖ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר בִּ⁠ירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 placed such a thing into the heart of the king to beautify the house of Yahweh which is in Jerusalem Giving something in the kings heart, that is, putting something in it, means leading him to have certain thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “led the king to want to glorify the temple of Yahweh in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 7 27 w14w figs-metaphor לְ⁠פָאֵ֕ר אֶת־בֵּ֥ית יְהוָ֖ה 1 the house of Yahweh This expression means to make something bright, glorious, or beautiful. Artaxerxes was not doing this literally, the way that Cyrus and Darius did by supporting the physical rebuilding of the temple. Rather, Artaxerxes was making sure that the temple would always have everything it needed to keep operating. In that way he was making sure that the temple would not languish and be disrespected, but rather, always be a vibrant place that was held in honor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to honor the temple of Yahweh” or “to make sure that the temple of Yahweh would always be a glorious place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ EZR 7 28 pb8i figs-quotemarks שָׂרֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ הַ⁠גּ
EZR 7 28 q1iu figs-metonymy הִתְחַזַּ֗קְתִּי כְּ⁠יַד־יְהוָ֤ה אֱלֹהַ⁠י֙ עָלַ֔⁠י 1 So I was strengthened As in [7:6](../07/06.md), **hand** figuratively represents power and control, and the expression **the hand of Yahweh my God upon me** indicates that Ezra enjoyed Yahwehs care, protection, and favor. Alternate translation: “I was encouraged because I recognized that Yahweh my God was helping me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 7 28 gxx2 figs-ellipsis מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֛ל רָאשִׁ֖ים 1 as the hand of Yahweh my God was upon me As [8:1](../08/01.md) shows, **heads** here is an abbreviated way of saying **heads of fathers houses**. Alternate translation: “some Israelite clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EZR 7 28 agha figs-idiom לַ⁠עֲל֥וֹת עִמִּֽ⁠י 1 as the hand of Yahweh my God was upon me Ezra says **go up** because he and the group he was leading would have to travel from a river valley up into the mountains in order to return from their places of exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to return to Jerusalem with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 8 intro ye9m 0 # Ezra 08 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The peoples return to Judah<br><br>Many people went back to Judah with Ezra. They trusted God to protect them and the precious items that they carried with them, which had been given for the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])
EZR 8 intro ye9m 0 # Ezra 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The peoples return to Judah<br><br>Many people went back to Judah with Ezra. They trusted God to protect them and the precious items that they carried with them, which had been given for the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])
EZR 8 1 wwtp writing-newevent וְ⁠אֵ֛לֶּה 1 General Information: The word **Now** introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural method<br>in your language to introduce a new event here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EZR 8 1 ss8d figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אֵ֛לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֥י אֲבֹתֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠הִתְיַחְשָׂ֑⁠ם הָ⁠עֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗⁠י 1 General Information: As in [4:3](../04/03.md), **heads of their fathers** is an abbreviated way of saying “heads of their fathers houses.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “These are the names of the clan leaders, along with the names of their clans, of those who traveled with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EZR 8 1 u9yy figs-idiom הָ⁠עֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗⁠י…מִ⁠בָּבֶֽל 1 General Information: As in [7:28](../07/28.md), Ezra says **go up** because the trip from Babylon to Jerusalem would involve a significant climb in elevation. Alternate translation: “who returned from Babylon with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -885,8 +885,8 @@ EZR 8 2 i7e9 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י אִיתָמָ֖ר דָּנִי
EZR 8 2 uzuw translate-names אִיתָמָ֖ר דָּנִיֵּ֑אל 1 of the sons of Ithamar, Daniel These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 8 2 kb7h figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י דָוִ֖יד חַטּֽוּשׁ 1 of the sons of David, Hattush Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of David, Hattush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 2 xt4r translate-names דָוִ֖יד חַטּֽוּשׁ 1 Hattush These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 8 3 m91f figs-explicit מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה 1 Parosh This could mean one of two things. (1) The phrase **from the sons of Shecaniah** probably applies to the end of the previous verse. 1 Chronicles 3:1922 shows that Hattush was the grandson of Shecaniah, and that Shecaniah was either the grandson or a more distant descendant of Zerubbabel, who was a descendant of King David. (As several of the following verses show, further information like this may be provided about the clan leaders on this list.) So the end of [8:2](../08/02.md) and the beginning of [8:3](../08/03.md) could read: “From the descendants of King David, Hattush, one of the descendants of Shecaniah” or (2) It could mean that Zechariah was the clan leader of the descendants of Shecaniah, and that they were all descendants of a more remote ancestor named Parosh. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 8 3 veab figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה 1 Parosh Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: (1) “one of the descendants of Shecaniah. From the descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” or, if you have decided that **from the sons of Shecaniah** applies to **Zechariah**, (2) <br>“From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 3 m91f figs-explicit מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה 1 Parosh This could mean one of two things. (1) The phrase **from the sons of Shecaniah** probably applies to the end of the previous verse. 1 Chronicles 3:1922 shows that Hattush was the grandson of Shecaniah, and that Shecaniah was either the grandson or a more distant descendant of Zerubbabel, who was a descendant of King David. (As several of the following verses show, further information like this may be provided about the clan leaders on this list.) So the end of [8:2](../08/02.md) and the beginning of [8:3](../08/03.md) could read: “From the descendants of King David, Hattush, one of the descendants of Shecaniah” or (2) It could mean that Zechariah was the clan leader of the descendants of Shecaniah, and that they were all descendants of a more remote ancestor named Parosh. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah”<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 8 3 veab figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה ס מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה 1 Parosh Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: (1) “one of the descendants of Shecaniah. From the descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” or, if you have decided that **from the sons of Shecaniah** applies to **Zechariah**, (2)<br>“From the descendants of Shecaniah, who were descendants of Parosh, Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 3 f6xt translate-names שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה…פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה 1 Parosh These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 8 3 ds2y figs-explicit וְ⁠עִמּ֛⁠וֹ הִתְיַחֵ֥שׂ לִ⁠זְכָרִ֖ים מֵאָ֥ה וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 with him were registered150 males The implication is that these 150 males belonged to the same clan as Zechariah. Alternate translation: “along with 150 other men from his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 8 4 f7d5 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵי֙ פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֔ב אֶלְיְהֽוֹעֵינַ֖י בֶּן־זְרַֽחְיָ֑ה 1 of the sons of Pahath-Moab, Eliehoenai son of Zerahiah Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pahath-Moab, Eliehoenai the son of Zerahiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ EZR 8 9 w699 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י יוֹאָ֔ב עֹבַדְיָ
EZR 8 9 u1te translate-names יוֹאָ֔ב עֹבַדְיָ֖ה…יְחִיאֵ֑ל 1 218 males These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 8 9 ude8 figs-explicit וְ⁠עִמּ֕⁠וֹ מָאתַ֛יִם וּ⁠שְׁמֹנָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר הַ⁠זְּכָרִֽים 1 218 males See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 218 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 8 10 x1dx figs-metaphor וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית בֶּן־יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה 1 160 males Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants”, but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shelomith, the son of Josiphiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 10 unnl translate-textvariants וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית בֶּן־יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה 1 160 males As in [8:5](../08/05.md), it appears that the name of the clan was accidentally left out at one point in the copying process for this verse. Since this list has been providing the name of each clan leader, it would be unusual for it to omit the leaders name here and state only the name of his father. Other ancient versions of the Old Testament in Greek say here, “from the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could follow those versions and include the following footnote: “The name Bani appears in ancient Greek versions.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah” If you want to translate only what is in the Hebrew, you could follow the ULT or translate, “And from the descendants of Shelomith, the son of Josiphiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) <br>
EZR 8 10 unnl translate-textvariants וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֥י שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית בֶּן־יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה 1 160 males As in [8:5](../08/05.md), it appears that the name of the clan was accidentally left out at one point in the copying process for this verse. Since this list has been providing the name of each clan leader, it would be unusual for it to omit the leaders name here and state only the name of his father. Other ancient versions of the Old Testament in Greek say here, “from the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could follow those versions and include the following footnote: “The name Bani appears in ancient Greek versions.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani, Shelomith the son of Josiphiah” If you want to translate only what is in the Hebrew, you could follow the ULT or translate, “And from the descendants of Shelomith, the son of Josiphiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br>
EZR 8 10 ex7w translate-names שְׁלוֹמִ֖ית…יוֹסִפְיָ֑ה 1 160 males These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 8 10 y254 figs-explicit וְ⁠עִמּ֕⁠וֹ מֵאָ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁשִּׁ֖ים הַ⁠זְּכָרִֽים 1 160 males See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 160 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 8 11 s7ng figs-metaphor וּ⁠מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י בֵבַ֔י זְכַרְיָ֖ה בֶּן־בֵּבָ֑י 1 Bebai Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bebai, Zechariah the son of Bebai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -959,7 +959,7 @@ EZR 8 21 zh8n translate-names הַ⁠נָּהָ֣ר אַהֲוָ֔א 1 the river
EZR 8 21 ms3x figs-exclusive לְ⁠הִתְעַנּ֖וֹת 1 the river Ahava Here Ezra is using **ourselves** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 21 baiq figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 the river Ahava Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 8 21 r9mg figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 the river Ahava In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “The God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 21 0qpc figs-exclusive לָ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠טַפֵּ֖⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠כָל־רְכוּשֵֽׁ⁠נוּ׃ 1 the river Ahava As Ezra tells his story, he uses **us** and **our** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 21 pqpc figs-exclusive לָ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠טַפֵּ֖⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠כָל־רְכוּשֵֽׁ⁠נוּ׃ 1 the river Ahava As Ezra tells his story, he uses **us** and **our** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 21 sq2q figs-metaphor לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ דֶּ֣רֶךְ יְשָׁרָ֔ה לָ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠טַפֵּ֖⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠כָל־רְכוּשֵֽׁ⁠נוּ 1 to seek a straight way from him for us and our little ones, and all our possessions The word **seek** represents asking God to do something for them. A **straight way** figuratively represents safety during travel. Alternate translation: “and to ask God to protect us while we traveled and also protect our children and all of our belongings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 22 kq0z grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good Here the word **For** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reasons for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “I did this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 8 22 cb97 בֹ֗שְׁתִּי לִ⁠שְׁא֤וֹל מִן־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ חַ֣יִל וּ⁠פָרָשִׁ֔ים לְ⁠עָזְרֵ֥⁠נוּ מֵ⁠אוֹיֵ֖ב בַּ⁠דָּ֑רֶךְ 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good **An enemy** means “any enemy,” and **on the way** means “during our journey.” Alternate translation: “I would have been embarrassed to ask the king for soldiers and horsemen to protect us from anyone who might try to harm or rob us during our journey”
@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ EZR 8 22 p625 grammar-connect-logic-result אָמַ֨רְנוּ לַ⁠מֶּ֜
EZR 8 22 hlkg figs-quotemarks יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ עַל־כָּל־מְבַקְשָׁי⁠ו֙ לְ⁠טוֹבָ֔ה וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל כָּל־עֹזְבָֽי⁠ו 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good This is a direct quotation. Ezra is quoting what he and his fellow travelers had told King Artaxerxes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off these words within quotation marks or by following whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 8 22 hpp7 figs-quotations יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ עַל־כָּל־מְבַקְשָׁי⁠ו֙ לְ⁠טוֹבָ֔ה וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל כָּל־עֹזְבָֽי⁠ו 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good This is a direct quotation. If it would be more natural in your language, you could make this an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
EZR 8 22 n4fd figs-metaphor יַד־אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ…לְ⁠טוֹבָ֔ה 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good This expression has the same meaning as **the good hand of God** in [7:6](../07/06.md). Here, the word **hand** figuratively represents action, and the phrase **the hand of our God is for good** means the care, protection, and favor of God. Alternate translation: “The favor of our God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 22 84rd figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “the God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 22 q4rd figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵ֤י⁠נוּ 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “the God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 22 ddh2 figs-metaphor כָּל־מְבַקְשָׁי⁠ו֙ 1 The hand of our God is on all those who seek him for good To **seek him** is a metaphor for worshiping, serving, and obeying him. Alternate translation: “everyone who loves and obeys him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 22 fb5x figs-metonymy וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ עַ֖ל 1 but his strength and his wrath are against all those who forsake him Gods power and anger being on people is a metonym for him punishing them. Alternate translation: “but he punishes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 8 22 ep6t figs-metaphor וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ 1 but his strength and his wrath are against all those who forsake him Here, the **nose** figuratively represents anger. Alternate translation: “his power and his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ EZR 8 22 xnzz figs-hendiadys וְ⁠עֻזּ֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אַפּ֔⁠וֹ 1
EZR 8 22 s41q figs-metaphor כָּל־עֹזְבָֽי⁠ו 1 but his strength and his wrath are against all those who forsake him Forsaking or abandoning God is a metaphor for refusing to serve him. Alternate translation: “all who refuse to serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 23 f2jm grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה 1 So we fasted and sought God about this matter The word **So** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Because Ezra was embarrassed to ask the king for protection, he and his fellow travelers earnestly prayed and fasted for Gods protection. Alternate translation: “For this reason, we fasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 8 23 nfn4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה וַ⁠נְּבַקְשָׁ֥⁠ה מֵ⁠אֱלֹהֵ֖י⁠נוּ עַל־זֹ֑את וַ⁠יֵּעָתֵ֖ר לָֽ⁠נוּ 1 So we fasted and sought God about this matter If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an active form for the last phrase. Alternate translation: “For this reason, we fasted and prayed to God about this, and he answered our prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 8 23 5tm6 figs-exclusive וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה…לָֽ⁠נוּ 1 So we fasted and sought God about this matter As Ezra tells his story, he uses **we** and **us** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 23 rtm6 figs-exclusive וַ⁠נָּצ֛וּמָ⁠ה…לָֽ⁠נוּ 1 So we fasted and sought God about this matter As Ezra tells his story, he uses **we** and **us** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 23 ppnz figs-exclusive מֵ⁠אֱלֹהֵ֖י⁠נוּ 1 So we fasted and sought God about this matter In this case, Ezra is using **our** in the inclusive sense, that is, it includes the reader, since he is reporting his trip to fellow believers in God. Alternate translation: “from the God to whom we all belong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 8 23 g9a0 figs-idiom וַ⁠יֵּעָתֵ֖ר לָֽ⁠נוּ 1 So we fasted and sought God about this matter As is clear from the way this expression is used elsewhere in the Bible, it means that God answered a prayer. For example, Genesis 25:21 says, “Isaac entreated Yahweh for his wife because she could not have children, and Yahweh was entreated by him, and Rebekah his wife conceived.” However, since Ezra does not describe until [8:32](../08/32.md) how the group arrived safely in Jerusalem, the prayer had not yet been answered at this point in the story. So an alternative meaning in context would be that the group received assurance that God would answer their prayer. Alternate translation: “and he answered our prayer” or “and we felt assured that he would answer our prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 8 24 u78j grammar-connect-time-sequential וָ⁠אַבְדִּ֛ילָ⁠ה 1 Sherebiah, Hashabiah The word **Then** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ EZR 8 27 q2jm translate-bmoney וּ⁠כְפֹרֵ֤י זָהָב֙ עֶשְׂר
EZR 8 28 zlh5 grammar-connect-time-sequential וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֣⁠ה 1 vessels of bronze This phrase indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. Ezra first weighed out the silver and gold and objects to the Levites, then he spoke the following words to them. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this time sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EZR 8 28 rbg4 figs-quotemarks וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֣⁠ה אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם 1 Then I said to them **Them** refers to the selected priests and Levites. In the rest of this verse and in [8:29](../08/29.md), Ezra is quoting what he told them on this occasion. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off the words that follow with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 8 28 afyr figs-idiom אַתֶּ֥ם קֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ לַ⁠יהוָ֔ה וְ⁠הַ⁠כֵּלִ֖ים קֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 Then I said to them Here, **holy** means “set apart for a special purpose.” Alternate translation: “I have selected you for a special mission. People also donated these objects for a special purpose. They are only to be used in the temple.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 8 28 w1c9 figs-metaphor אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 Then I said to them Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 28 w1c9 figs-metaphor אֱלֹהֵ֥י אֲבֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 Then I said to them Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 8 29 im6g figs-ellipsis שִׁקְד֣וּ וְ⁠שִׁמְר֗וּ 1 until you weigh them out before the heads of the priests and the Levites, and the heads of the fathers houses Here Ezra leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. He is describing what the priests and Levites must do with the objects, the silver, and the gold that were devoted to Yahweh. You could indicate that explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Take good care of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EZR 8 29 z0lx figs-hendiadys שִׁקְד֣וּ וְ⁠שִׁמְר֗וּ 1 until you weigh them out before the heads of the priests and the Levites, and the heads of the fathers houses These two words work together to give one idea. Ezra uses them together to emphasize how carefully the priests and Levites need to guard the silver and gold and objects. Alternate translation: “Guard diligently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EZR 8 29 mtxm figs-explicit עַֽד־תִּשְׁקְל֡וּ 1 until you weigh them out before the heads of the priests and the Levites, and the heads of the fathers houses The implication is that when the priests and Levites arrived in Jerusalem, they would weigh out the silver, gold, and bronze to show the authorities there that they had not lost or taken any of it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “until you can weigh them out to prove that all of it is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1034,14 +1034,14 @@ EZR 8 34 sqb5 figs-explicit בְּ⁠מִסְפָּ֥ר בְּ⁠מִשְׁקָ
EZR 8 34 nh2n figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֥ב כָּֽל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁקָ֖ל 1 Jeshua If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The priests and Levites in the temple wrote down the weight of all of the silver and gold and of the objects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 8 35 gxu7 figs-parallelism הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה 1 those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles These two phrases mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The Jews who had returned from exile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 8 35 qo2t figs-idiom הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה 1 those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles As indicated in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [8:35](../08/35.md), the phrase **the sons of the exile** refers specifically to the group of Jewish people who returned to the land of Judah from Babylon after King Nebuchadnezzar had conquered Jerusalem and had taken many Jews as captives to Babylon. Alternate translation: “The Jews who had returned from exile” or “The Jews who had returned to their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 8 35 fbh8 figs-123person הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה 1 those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles Here the story shifts from Ezra's first-person account to a third-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person. <br>Alternate translation: “We who had gone into exile in Babylonia but had now returned from captivity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 8 35 fbh8 figs-123person הַ֠⁠בָּאִים מֵֽ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֨י בְנֵֽי־הַ⁠גּוֹלָ֜ה 1 those who had come back from the captivity, the sons of the exiles Here the story shifts from Ezra's first-person account to a third-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person.<br>Alternate translation: “We who had gone into exile in Babylonia but had now returned from captivity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 8 35 lgl7 figs-explicit הִקְרִ֥יבוּ עֹל֣וֹת ׀ לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל פָּרִ֨ים שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֤ר עַל־כָּל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֵילִ֣ים ׀ תִּשְׁעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּׁ֗ה כְּבָשִׂים֙ שִׁבְעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁבְעָ֔ה צְפִירֵ֥י חַטָּ֖את שְׁנֵ֣ים עָשָׂ֑ר הַ⁠כֹּ֖ל עוֹלָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 twelve … ninety-six … seventy-seven … twelve The book assumes that readers will recognize that there are two types of offerings here. The bulls, rams, and lambs are offerings of the first type. They were offered in order to express a desire to be in good standing with God by creating an aroma, the smell of roasting meat, that was considered to be pleasing to God. These were completely burned up. The goats are the second type of offering. As in [6:17](../06/17.md), the goats were a **sin offering**. These were offered as a request for forgiveness from God. As explained in Leviticus 4:22-26 and 6:24-30, only the fat of these goats was burned up. The meat of these goats was for the priests to eat. The phrase **The whole was a burnt up offering** is a summary that includes the two types of offerings, one that was completely burned up and the other that was partially burned up. Therefore the final sentence means, "All of this was properly subjected to fire on the altar as sacrifices to Yahweh." The book assumes that readers know this. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered as burnt offerings to the God of Israel 12 bulls for all Israel, 96 rams, and 77 lambs, and as a sin offering 12 male goats. All of these sacrifices were offered to Yahweh through fire on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br>
EZR 8 35 rdop translate-symaction הִקְרִ֥יבוּ עֹל֣וֹת ׀ לֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל פָּרִ֨ים שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֤ר עַל־כָּל־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ אֵילִ֣ים ׀ תִּשְׁעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁשָּׁ֗ה כְּבָשִׂים֙ שִׁבְעִ֣ים וְ⁠שִׁבְעָ֔ה צְפִירֵ֥י חַטָּ֖את שְׁנֵ֣ים עָשָׂ֑ר 1 twelve … ninety-six … seventy-seven … twelve The numbers of animals offered are symbolic, as the book explains in the case of the bulls. There were 12 bulls **for all Israel** because there were twelve tribes of Israel. There were 12 goats for the same reason. The same symbolism seems to lie behind the 96 rams, since that number is eight times 12, although the significance of the number eight is no longer apparent. The number 77 is an intensive form of the number seven, which symbolizes completeness. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered 12 bulls, one for each of the tribes of Israel, 96 rams, eight for each of the tribes of Israel, and 77 lambs, expressing completeness, as burnt offerings to the God of Israel, and 12 male goats as a sin offering, one for each of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EZR 8 36 r5gu figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנ֣וּ ׀ אֶת־דָּתֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ לַ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ וּ⁠פַחֲו֖וֹת עֵ֣בֶר הַ⁠נָּהָ֑ר 1 the governors in the Province Beyond the River Here, **the laws of the king** seem to mean the decrees that Artaxerxes issued in the letter he gave to Ezra, and specifically the provisions that allowed Ezra to ask for support for the temple, exempted temple personnel from taxation, and allowed Ezra to appoint judges. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Ezra and the Jewish leaders informed the royal officials and governors in Beyond-the-River province of the decrees that Artaxerxes had issued in his letter to Ezra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 8 36 6zj3 figs-123person וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנ֣וּ 1 the governors in the Province Beyond the River Here the story uses a third-person account rather than Ezra's first-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person. <br>Alternate translation: “We also gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 8 36 7ep8 translate-unknown לַ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ וּ⁠פַחֲו֖וֹת 1 the governors in the Province Beyond the River The word **satraps** refers to rulers appointed by the king to rule over his provinces, such as the province of Beyond-the-River in which Judah was located. The **governors** were lower officials who worked in the province under the direction of the satrap. Use the words that communicate this best in your language. Alternate translation: “to those who rule over the king's provinces and to the authorities in the province of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EZR 8 36 szj3 figs-123person וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנ֣וּ 1 the governors in the Province Beyond the River Here the story uses a third-person account rather than Ezra's first-person account. If that is confusing in your language, you can continue the story in first person.<br>Alternate translation: “We also gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 8 36 tep8 translate-unknown לַ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ וּ⁠פַחֲו֖וֹת 1 the governors in the Province Beyond the River The word **satraps** refers to rulers appointed by the king to rule over his provinces, such as the province of Beyond-the-River in which Judah was located. The **governors** were lower officials who worked in the province under the direction of the satrap. Use the words that communicate this best in your language. Alternate translation: “to those who rule over the king's provinces and to the authorities in the province of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EZR 8 36 d38g figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִשְּׂא֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם וְ⁠אֶת־בֵּֽית־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 the Province Beyond the River Here, **lifted** is a metaphor that means supported and sustained. Alternate translation: “The group that had returned with Ezra supported the people of Judah and Jerusalem and the temple of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 9 intro k1yz 0 # Ezra 09 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Intermarriage<br><br>When Ezra found out that many Jews who had returned from exile had married Gentile wives, he prayed to God and confessed this sin of his people. He acknowledged that God had been good to them much more than they deserved by letting these few people return from captivity and then they sinned by marrying Gentile wives. The Jewish people had done this before and God had punished them for it. God forbade this type of marriage because it caused the people to worship other gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Exclusive forms<br><br>Ezra uses many first person plural pronouns as he prays to God. Since Ezra is speaking to God, these forms of "we," "us," and "our" would all be the exclusive forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 9 intro k1yz 0 # Ezra 9 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Intermarriage<br><br>When Ezra found out that many Jews who had returned from exile had married Gentile wives, he prayed to God and confessed this sin of his people. He acknowledged that God had been good to them much more than they deserved by letting these few people return from captivity and then they sinned by marrying Gentile wives. The Jewish people had done this before and God had punished them for it. God forbade this type of marriage because it caused the people to worship other gods. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>### Exclusive forms<br><br>Ezra uses many first person plural pronouns as he prays to God. Since Ezra is speaking to God, these forms of "we," "us," and "our" would all be the exclusive forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
EZR 9 1 ella grammar-connect-time-sequential וּ⁠כְ⁠כַלּ֣וֹת אֵ֗לֶּה 1 have not separated themselves This phrase indicates that the events the story will now relate came right after the events it has just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EZR 9 1 nhkw writing-newevent וּ⁠כְ⁠כַלּ֣וֹת 1 have not separated themselves The word **now** introduces a new event in the story. If your language has a word or expression for introducing a new event, use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EZR 9 1 on7w figs-explicit הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ 1 have not separated themselves These appear to be the same **leaders** as in [8:29](../08/29.md), that is, clan leaders. But this is not a reference to all of them, since the ones who come to Ezra say that some of their fellow leaders have married foreign women. Alternate translation: “some of the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ EZR 9 5 v2nb figs-idiom קַ֚מְתִּי מִ⁠תַּֽעֲנִיתִ֔⁠י
EZR 9 5 zygv translate-symaction וּ⁠בְ⁠קָרְעִ֥⁠י בִגְדִ֖⁠י וּ⁠מְעִילִ֑⁠י 1 my fasting As the note to [9:3](../09/03.md) explains, Ezra had torn his clothes to show how wrong it was for the Israelites to have married foreign women. By not changing out of his torn clothes, Ezra was continuing to show that symbolically. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I kept wearing my torn clothes to show how wrong it was for the Israelites to have married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EZR 9 5 qye1 translate-symaction וָֽ⁠אֶכְרְעָ⁠ה֙ עַל־בִּרְכַּ֔⁠י וָ⁠אֶפְרְשָׂ֥⁠ה כַפַּ֖⁠י אֶל־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהָֽ⁠י 1 knelt down on my knees, and spread out my hands These two physical gestures showed publicly that Ezra was going to pray. Alternate translation: “I knelt down and spread out my hands in a gesture of prayer to Yahweh my God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EZR 9 6 y5xu figs-quotemarks וָ⁠אֹמְרָ֗⁠ה 1 our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens After this phrase Ezra begins to quote what he said out loud in prayer on this occasion. The quotation continues through [9:15](../09/15.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 9 6 n5z1 figs-possession אֱלֹהַ⁠י֙…אֱלֹהַ֛⁠י 1 our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens Here, **My God** means that Ezra belongs to God, not that God belongs to Ezra. <br>If that is not clear in your language, then use a different phrase. Alternate translation: “O God, to whom I belong” or “God, whom I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
EZR 9 6 n5z1 figs-possession אֱלֹהַ⁠י֙…אֱלֹהַ֛⁠י 1 our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens Here, **My God** means that Ezra belongs to God, not that God belongs to Ezra.<br>If that is not clear in your language, then use a different phrase. Alternate translation: “O God, to whom I belong” or “God, whom I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
EZR 9 6 yz8d figs-doublet בֹּ֣שְׁתִּי וְ⁠נִכְלַ֔מְתִּי 1 I am ashamed and humiliated **Ashamed** and **humiliated** mean very similar things. Ezra uses them together to emphasize how disgraced he feels by what the Israelites have done. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “I am deeply disgraced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EZR 9 6 xiue figs-metaphor לְ⁠הָרִ֧ים…פָּנַ֖⁠י אֵלֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens This means “to look at you directly” or “to look at you face to face,” and since Ezra could not do that literally with God, it is a figurative way of saying “*to address you.” Alternate translation: “even to speak to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 9 6 aca6 figs-parallelism כִּ֣י עֲוֺנֹתֵ֤י⁠נוּ רָבוּ֙ לְ⁠מַ֣עְלָ⁠ה רֹּ֔אשׁ וְ⁠אַשְׁמָתֵ֥⁠נוּ גָדְלָ֖ה עַ֥ד לַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 our iniquities have risen higher than our head, and our guilt has grown up to the heavens These two phrases mean similar things. Ezra uses the repetition to emphasize how guilty the people of Israel are. If repeating the same thing twice would be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one and show the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We have committed such great sins that our guilt because of them is completely overwhelming us” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The first phrase speaks of the effects of these sins on the Israelites, while the second phrase speaks of their effects on their standing with God. Alternate translation: “We have committed such great sins that they are overwhelming us, and we know that they are making us guilty before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@ -1087,7 +1087,7 @@ EZR 9 7 sv5f figs-idiom מִ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵ֗י⁠נוּ 1 the days o
EZR 9 7 aqdp figs-metaphor אֲבֹתֵ֗י⁠נוּ 1 the days of our fathers **Fathers** here, figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 9 7 jw4h figs-idiom עַ֖ד הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 the days of our fathers In this context, **day** does not refer to one specific day, but rather, to a more general time. Alternate translation: “until this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 9 7 ur0z figs-metonymy אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ בְּ⁠אַשְׁמָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֔ה 1 the days of our fathers Here, Ezra speaks figuratively of the disobedience of the Israelites by reference to something associated with it, the guilt that it has caused. Alternate translation: “we have consistently disobeyed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 9 7 rgen figs-metonymy אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ 1 the days of our fathers By **we** here, Ezra is referring to all of the Jewish people. See the UST. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 9 7 rgen figs-metonymy אֲנַ֨חְנוּ֙ 1 the days of our fathers By **we** here, Ezra is referring to all of the Jewish people. See the UST.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 9 7 wet1 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠אַשְׁמָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֔ה 1 very guilty … our iniquities If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **guilt** with a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “consistently disobeyed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 9 7 h1bs figs-activepassive נִתַּ֡נּוּ אֲנַחְנוּ֩ מְלָכֵ֨י⁠נוּ כֹהֲנֵ֜י⁠נוּ בְּ⁠יַ֣ד ׀ מַלְכֵ֣י הָ⁠אֲרָצ֗וֹת 1 we … have been delivered into the hand of kings If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “you put us, our kings, and our priests into the hands of foreign rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 9 7 dr9f figs-metaphor נִתַּ֡נּוּ אֲנַחְנוּ֩ מְלָכֵ֨י⁠נוּ כֹהֲנֵ֜י⁠נוּ בְּ⁠יַ֣ד ׀ מַלְכֵ֣י הָ⁠אֲרָצ֗וֹת 1 we … have been delivered into the hand of kings Here, **hand** figuratively represents power and control. Alternate translation: “you allowed foreign rulers to conquer us, our kings, and our priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -1095,11 +1095,11 @@ EZR 9 7 v9sd figs-idiom מַלְכֵ֣י הָ⁠אֲרָצ֗וֹת 1 into the ha
EZR 9 7 f2hv figs-idiom בַּ⁠חֶ֜רֶב בַּ⁠שְּׁבִ֧י וּ⁠בַ⁠בִּזָּ֛ה וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹ֥שֶׁת פָּנִ֖ים 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces Other than **by sword**, these are not the means by which the foreign rulers conquered the Israelites. Rather, they are primarily things that happened to the Israelites after they were conquered. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “They killed some of us, they took others of us away from our homeland, they stole the things that belonged to us, and all of this has made us greatly ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 9 7 kz7f figs-metonymy בַּ⁠חֶ֜רֶב 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces The sword figuratively represents killing, by reference to one kind of weapon that can kill a person. Alternate translation: “who killed some of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 9 7 lc37 figs-abstractnouns בַּ⁠שְּׁבִ֧י 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **captivity** with a verb such as “take away.” Alternate translation: “who took others away from our homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 9 7 5iq9 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בַ⁠בִּזָּ֛ה 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **plunder** with a verb such as “steal.” Alternate translation: “who stole the things that belonged to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 9 7 uiq9 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בַ⁠בִּזָּ֛ה 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **plunder** with a verb such as “steal.” Alternate translation: “who stole the things that belonged to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 9 7 x0gf figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹ֥שֶׁת פָּנִ֖ים 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **shame** with a word such as “ashamed.” Alternate translation: “and all of this has made us greatly ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 9 7 uvig figs-synecdoche וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹ֥שֶׁת פָּנִ֖ים 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces Here, Ezra uses the **face** to describe the whole person figuratively, by reference to one part of a person, their face, which would show their shame by its expression. Alternate translation: “and made us greatly ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EZR 9 7 nj7e figs-idiom כְּ⁠הַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 to the sword, to captivity, and to plunder, and to ashamed faces In this context, **day** does not refer to one specific day, but rather to a more general time that includes the day that Ezra is praying to God. Alternate translation: “and that is still our situation now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 9 8 5lor grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠עַתָּ֡ה 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God The phrase **But now** indicates that the sentence that it introduces draws a contrast between what the Israelites had been experiencing in the past and what God was now doing. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EZR 9 8 vlor grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠עַתָּ֡ה 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God The phrase **But now** indicates that the sentence that it introduces draws a contrast between what the Israelites had been experiencing in the past and what God was now doing. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EZR 9 8 q4h6 figs-idiom כִּ⁠מְעַט־רֶגַע֩ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God Alternate translation: “for just a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 9 8 jqq9 figs-abstractnouns הָיְתָ֨ה תְחִנָּ֜ה מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת ׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֵ֗י⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God The abstract noun **favor** refers to one person helping another person even if that person does not deserve it. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind this word with a phrase such as “be merciful.” Alternate translation: “Yahweh our God has been merciful to us” or “Yahweh our God has been gracious to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EZR 9 8 ym5g figs-personification הָיְתָ֨ה תְחִנָּ֜ה מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת ׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֵ֗י⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God Ezra speaks here of **favor** or mercy as if it could travel from Yahweh to the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yahweh our God has been merciful to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@ -1112,9 +1112,9 @@ EZR 9 8 lst9 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠מְק֣וֹם קָדְשׁ֑⁠וֹ 1 grace
EZR 9 8 h7p2 grammar-connect-logic-result לְ⁠הַשְׁאִ֥יר לָ֨⁠נוּ֙ פְּלֵיטָ֔ה 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God This phrase starts with **to**, which indicates here that the phrase that follows is a result of the phrase that came before. In fact, there are four results in this verse of receiving favor from God. Each result begins with the word **to**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate that these are results of receiving favor from God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 9 8 e1ad figs-123person לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God Here again Ezra speaks of God in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words in the second person. Alternate translation: “for you, our God, to bring light to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 9 8 gg6p figs-parallelism לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר עֵינֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠תִתֵּ֛⁠נוּ מִֽחְיָ֥ה מְעַ֖ט בְּ⁠עַבְדֻתֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God These two phrases mean similar things. Ezra uses the repetition to emphasize how merciful God has been to the community of returned exiles. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “and for our God to enable our community to thrive a little even under foreign domination” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase says more specifically how God has accomplished what the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “for our God to give us new vitality by giving us greater freedom even though we are under foreign domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EZR 9 8 fzoq figs-metaphor לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר עֵינֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God To **brighten** the **eyes** of a person means figuratively to give them new life and vitality in the sense of restoring someone's happiness or well-being. Alternate translation: “for our God to give us new vitality” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 9 8 fzoq figs-metaphor לְ⁠הָאִ֤יר עֵינֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God To **brighten** the **eyes** of a person means figuratively to give them new life and vitality in the sense of restoring someone's happiness or well-being. Alternate translation: “for our God to give us new vitality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 9 8 f4s0 figs-explicit וּ⁠לְ⁠תִתֵּ֛⁠נוּ מִֽחְיָ֥ה מְעַ֖ט בְּ⁠עַבְדֻתֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 grace has been shown from Yahweh our God Since Ezra says that God has made the community figuratively more alive **in our slavery**, he seems to be referring implicitly to the greater measure of freedom that King Artaxerxes has allowed them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by giving us greater freedom even though we are under foreign domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 9 9 10m3 figs-hyperbole כִּֽי־עֲבָדִ֣ים אֲנַ֔חְנוּ 1 but he extended covenant faithfulness to us Ezra describes the Jewish people as **slaves**, which is an exaggeration that he uses to express humility before God. It is true that their ancestors were taken as captives to Babylon where they were forced to serve the king, and that even now they must do as the king commands, but those who have returned to Judah are allowed to manage their own daily affairs. Alternate translation: “The Babylonians made our people to be slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EZR 9 9 w0m3 figs-hyperbole כִּֽי־עֲבָדִ֣ים אֲנַ֔חְנוּ 1 but he extended covenant faithfulness to us Ezra describes the Jewish people as **slaves**, which is an exaggeration that he uses to express humility before God. It is true that their ancestors were taken as captives to Babylon where they were forced to serve the king, and that even now they must do as the king commands, but those who have returned to Judah are allowed to manage their own daily affairs. Alternate translation: “The Babylonians made our people to be slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EZR 9 9 n7de figs-123person לֹ֥א עֲזָבָ֖⁠נוּ אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 but he extended covenant faithfulness to us Ezra continues to speak of God in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words in the second person. Alternate translation: “you, our God, have not forsaken us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 9 9 gk7w grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַֽ⁠יַּט 1 but he extended covenant faithfulness to us This word **But** indicates that the sentence it introduces draws a contrast between what the Israelites might have expected God to do, since they were being punished for their disobedience, and what God actually did. You could begin the sentence with a phrase such as “on the contrary” or other method in your language to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EZR 9 9 h0hr figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יַּט־עָלֵ֣י⁠נוּ חֶ֡סֶד 1 but he extended covenant faithfulness to us As in [7:28](../07/28.md), Ezra uses a spatial metaphor to depict help figuratively stretching out to him from Yahweh. Alternate translation: “On the contrary, he has helped us, as he promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ EZR 10 3 zmyn figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠נּוֹלָ֤ד מֵ⁠הֶם֙
EZR 10 3 iljp figs-123person בַּ⁠עֲצַ֣ת אֲדֹנָ֔⁠י 1 We have been unfaithful to our God Shekaniah addresses Ezra in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate this with the second person. Alternate translation: “doing it in the way that you, my lord, advise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EZR 10 3 zzvz figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַ⁠חֲרֵדִ֖ים בְּ⁠מִצְוַ֣ת אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ 1 We have been unfaithful to our God As in [9:4](../09/04.md), **tremble** here is a metaphor meaning to regard someone or something with respect and reverential fear. Alternate translation: “and in the way that seems right to everyone who respects the commandment of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 10 3 hla5 figs-activepassive וְ⁠כַ⁠תּוֹרָ֖ה יֵעָשֶֽׂה 1 We have been unfaithful to our God If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “And let us make sure that we are following what the law commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 10 3 p5it figs-infostructure וְ⁠כַ⁠תּוֹרָ֖ה יֵעָשֶֽׂה 1 We have been unfaithful to our God If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this more general statement before the specific one about cutting a covenant, as in the UST. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
EZR 10 3 p5it figs-infostructure וְ⁠כַ⁠תּוֹרָ֖ה יֵעָשֶֽׂה 1 We have been unfaithful to our God If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this more general statement before the specific one about cutting a covenant, as in the UST.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
EZR 10 4 tx9m figs-idiom ק֛וּם 1 we are with you Here, as in several other places in the book, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way. It could also mean to physically arise, since Ezra was lying prostrate on the ground. Alternate translation: “Get up and do something about this situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 4 ao5k figs-idiom כִּֽי־עָלֶ֥י⁠ךָ הַ⁠דָּבָ֖ר 1 we are with you This is a Hebrew idiom. Alternate translation: “because this is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 4 d8d8 figs-idiom כִּֽי־עָלֶ֥י⁠ךָ הַ⁠דָּבָ֖ר 1 we are with you The implication is that this was Ezras responsibility because King Artaxerxes had given him the mandate to teach the Jews to follow the commandments of Yahweh and he also gave him the authority to ensure that they did follow those commandments. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because this is your responsibility, since the king told you to teach us Yahwehs commandments and to make sure that we follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -1196,9 +1196,9 @@ EZR 10 4 m4vg וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ עִמָּ֑⁠ךְ 1 we are with you
EZR 10 4 hrga figs-ellipsis חֲזַ֖ק וַ⁠עֲשֵֽׂה 1 we are with you Here, Shekaniah leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “Be strong and take action to address this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EZR 10 4 bhrm figs-quotemarks חֲזַ֖ק וַ⁠עֲשֵֽׂה 1 we are with you After this phrase, the book ends its quotation of what Shekaniah said to Ezra on this occasion. If you decided in [10:2](../10/02.md) to mark his words as a quotation, you should indicate their ending here with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EZR 10 5 v0zf grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם 1 we are with you Here the word **And** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentences described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 10 5 p6uh figs-idiom וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם עֶזְרָ֡א 1 we are with you Here also, **arose** means “took action to get an enterprise under way.” It could also mean to physically arise, since Ezra had been lying prostrate on the ground. <br>Alternate translation: “So Ezra got up, took initiative,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 5 p6uh figs-idiom וַ⁠יָּ֣קָם עֶזְרָ֡א 1 we are with you Here also, **arose** means “took action to get an enterprise under way.” It could also mean to physically arise, since Ezra had been lying prostrate on the ground.<br>Alternate translation: “So Ezra got up, took initiative,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 5 zxso figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 we are with you Here the book refers to the Israelites by the name of their nation. Alternate translation: “all of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EZR 10 5 9ok9 figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 we are with you Here, **all Israel** is an exaggeration that is meant to express the idea that Ezra made every Israelite who was there swear an oath. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it without the exaggeration. Alternate translation: “and every Israelite who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EZR 10 5 xok9 figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 we are with you Here, **all Israel** is an exaggeration that is meant to express the idea that Ezra made every Israelite who was there swear an oath. If this is not clear in your language, you can state it without the exaggeration. Alternate translation: “and every Israelite who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EZR 10 5 medp figs-explicit לַ⁠עֲשׂ֛וֹת כַּ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 we are with you The implication in context is that **this word** refers to Shekaniahs recommendation that the Jews send away all the foreign wives and their children. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to do what Shekaniah had recommended and make the Israelites send away all the foreign wives and their children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 10 6 k8jp figs-metaphor מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵי֙ בֵּ֣ית הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 Jehohanan … Eliashib As in [10:1](../10/01.md), **face** here figuratively means the front of a place. Alternate translation: “from in front of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 10 6 j78q figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּ֕לֶךְ אֶל־לִשְׁכַּ֖ת יְהוֹחָנָ֣ן בֶּן־אֶלְיָשִׁ֑יב 1 Jehohanan … Eliashib As in [8:29](../08/29.md), **chamber** means a room, and in context here it seems to refer similarly to one of the rooms in the temple. Eliashib was the high priest, and so it is probable that one of his family members would have had a room there. The book does not say why Ezra went to one of the rooms in the temple, but the implication is that he did so in order to meet further with the community leaders and make plans for the assembly that the following verses describe. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he went to one of the rooms in the temple, the one that belonged to Jehohanan the grandson of Eliashib, to meet further with the leaders to make plans to call an assembly of all the returned exiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ EZR 10 13 poap grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֗ה
EZR 10 13 wqu4 figs-idiom לֹֽא־לְ⁠י֤וֹם אֶחָד֙ וְ⁠לֹ֣א לִ⁠שְׁנַ֔יִם 1 this is not the work of one or two days The phrase **neither for one day nor for two** is a figurative way of saying “not a matter of a short time.” Alternate translation: “something that will take a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 14 fcw7 figs-idiom יַֽעֲמְדוּ־נָ֣א שָׂ֠רֵי⁠נוּ לְֽ⁠כָל־הַ⁠קָּהָ֞ל 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities Here, **stand for** is an idiom that means “represent.” (In [10:16](../10/16.md) it explains specifically how the community arranged for its leaders to be its representatives.) Alternate translation: “Let our leaders represent all of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 14 wybo figs-idiom הַ⁠הֹשִׁ֞יב נָשִׁ֤ים נָכְרִיּוֹת֙ 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities See how you translated this expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “those who have married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 14 8ewp figs-activepassive לְ⁠עִתִּ֣ים מְזֻמָּנִ֔ים 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “at times that you set for each one” or “when you have arranged for them to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 10 14 yewp figs-activepassive לְ⁠עִתִּ֣ים מְזֻמָּנִ֔ים 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “at times that you set for each one” or “when you have arranged for them to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 10 14 wvv6 figs-idiom וְ⁠עִמָּ⁠הֶ֛ם זִקְנֵי־עִ֥יר וָ⁠עִ֖יר וְ⁠שֹׁפְטֶ֑י⁠הָ 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities The phrase **city by city** is an idiom that means “each city.” Alternate translation: “with the elders and magistrates of each city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])<br>
EZR 10 14 n0xr figs-idiom חֲר֤וֹן אַף־אֱלֹהֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities The idiom **burning of the nose** refers to being angry. Alternate translation: “our God's anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 14 qdri figs-metaphor עַ֠ד לְ⁠הָשִׁ֞יב חֲר֤וֹן אַף־אֱלֹהֵ֨י⁠נוּ֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ עַ֖ד לַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 at the appointed time with the elders and judges of each of their cities When someones anger is **turned back**, that means figuratively that the person is no longer angry. Alternate translation: “until our God is no longer angry with us for disobeying in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -1273,11 +1273,11 @@ EZR 10 17 i02i figs-idiom וַ⁠יְכַלּ֣וּ בַ⁠כֹּ֔ל אֲנָש
EZR 10 17 gtyy figs-idiom הַ⁠הֹשִׁ֖יבוּ נָשִׁ֣ים נָכְרִיּ֑וֹת 1 first day of the first month See how you translated this expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “who had married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 17 kgk5 translate-hebrewmonths עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן 1 first day of the first month You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to use the numbers of the Hebrew day and month. Alternate translation: “by the first day of the first month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EZR 10 17 u24d translate-ordinal עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן 1 first day of the first month The Hebrew uses a cardinal number here, **one**, but there is not a significant difference in meaning between that and the way the Hebrew uses an ordinal number, “first,” in similar contexts elsewhere. If your language customarily uses ordinals for the numbers of days, you can do that here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the tenth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EZR 10 17 0ib9 figs-infostructure עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן 1 first day of the first month If it is more natural in your language, you can put this time phrase first in the verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
EZR 10 17 zib9 figs-infostructure עַ֛ד י֥וֹם אֶחָ֖ד לַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשֽׁוֹן 1 first day of the first month If it is more natural in your language, you can put this time phrase first in the verse, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
EZR 10 18 rqg8 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵא֙ מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י 1 Jeshua If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. “The clan leaders identified some men from among” Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EZR 10 18 vpyw figs-idiom מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים 1 Jeshua Here, **sons of** is a figurative expression that means “descendants of.” These men are all descendants of men who had been priests in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “among the descendants of the priests” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 18 vpyw figs-idiom מִ⁠בְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֔ים 1 Jeshua Here, **sons of** is a figurative expression that means “descendants of.” These men are all descendants of men who had been priests in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “among the descendants of the priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 18 w0rr figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֹשִׁ֖יבוּ נָשִׁ֣ים נָכְרִיּ֑וֹת 1 Jeshua See how you translated this expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “who had married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 18 sf5b figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֨י יֵשׁ֤וּעַ בֶּן־יֽוֹצָדָק֙ וְ⁠אֶחָ֔י⁠ו 1 Maaseiah … Gedaliah Here, **the sons of Jeshua** figuratively means “the descendants of Jeshua,” since Jeshua lived many years before this time, but **son of Jozadak** is literal because Jeshua was the biological son of Jozadak. **Brothers** could mean biological brothers, but it is more likely that it refers figuratively to relatives. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jeshua the son of Jozadak and his relatives” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 10 18 sf5b figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֨י יֵשׁ֤וּעַ בֶּן־יֽוֹצָדָק֙ וְ⁠אֶחָ֔י⁠ו 1 Maaseiah … Gedaliah Here, **the sons of Jeshua** figuratively means “the descendants of Jeshua,” since Jeshua lived many years before this time, but **son of Jozadak** is literal because Jeshua was the biological son of Jozadak. **Brothers** could mean biological brothers, but it is more likely that it refers figuratively to relatives. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jeshua the son of Jozadak and his relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EZR 10 18 pp5e translate-names מַֽעֲשֵׂיָה֙ וֶֽ⁠אֱלִיעֶ֔זֶר וְ⁠יָרִ֖יב וּ⁠גְדַלְיָֽה 1 Eliezer … Jarib These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 19 xu0s grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּתְּנ֥וּ 1 Eliezer … Jarib Here the word **So** indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result, they gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EZR 10 19 w25u translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּתְּנ֥וּ יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 Eliezer … Jarib This means that the men shook hands with the clan leaders to signify that they were making a promise. Alternate translation: “So they shook hands in pledge” or “So they grasped hands with their leaders as a sign of promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ EZR 10 35 pcb9 translate-names בְּנָיָ֥ה בֵדְיָ֖ה כלהי 1 Be
EZR 10 36 h5e9 translate-names וַנְיָ֥ה מְרֵמ֖וֹת אֶלְיָשִֽׁיב 1 Meremoth These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 37 j4vh translate-names מַתַּנְיָ֥ה מַתְּנַ֖י ו⁠יעשו 1 General Information: These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 38 z3zn translate-names וּ⁠בָנִ֥י וּ⁠בִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי 1 Binnui These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 38 p5vk translate-textvariants וּ⁠בָנִ֥י וּ⁠בִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי 1 Binnui The ULT represents the reading of the Hebrew text, but many scholars believe that the correct reading of this verse is found in ancient Greek translations. This is represented in the UST. You may choose to follow the reading of the preferred Bible translation used in your area, and include the other reading in a footnote. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
EZR 10 38 p5vk translate-textvariants וּ⁠בָנִ֥י וּ⁠בִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי 1 Binnui The ULT represents the reading of the Hebrew text, but many scholars believe that the correct reading of this verse is found in ancient Greek translations. This is represented in the UST. You may choose to follow the reading of the preferred Bible translation used in your area, and include the other reading in a footnote.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
EZR 10 39 maz3 translate-names וְ⁠שֶֽׁלֶמְיָ֥ה וְ⁠נָתָ֖ן וַ⁠עֲדָיָֽה 1 Adaiah These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 40 jlxi translate-names מַכְנַדְבַ֥י שָׁשַׁ֖י שָׁרָֽי 1 Adaiah These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 41 mf9g translate-names עֲזַרְאֵ֥ל וְ⁠שֶׁלֶמְיָ֖הוּ שְׁמַרְיָֽה 1 General Information: These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -1329,4 +1329,4 @@ EZR 10 43 cab3 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בְּנֵ֖י נְב֑וֹ 1 Nebo Here, **s
EZR 10 43 tih9 translate-names יְעִיאֵ֤ל מַתִּתְיָה֙ זָבָ֣ד זְבִינָ֔א יַדַּ֥י וְ⁠יוֹאֵ֖ל בְּנָיָֽה 1 Jeiel These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EZR 10 44 f8ms figs-idiom כָּל־אֵ֕לֶּה נָשְׂא֖וּ נָשִׁ֣ים נָכְרִיּ֑וֹת 1 All of these As in [9:2](../09/02.md), **lifted** is an idiom that means “married.” Alternate translation: “All of these men had married foreign women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EZR 10 44 bri0 figs-explicit וְ⁠יֵ֣שׁ מֵ⁠הֶ֣ם נָשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠יָּשִׂ֖ימוּ בָּנִֽים 1 All of these The implication is that if a foreign wife had borne children, the Israelite husband would send both the wife and her children away, as [10:3](../10/03.md) describes. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Some of the foreign wives had borne children, and the men who had married them divorced them and sent away both them and their children.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EZR 10 44 kg57 figs-gendernotations בָּנִֽים 1 All of these The term **sons** here means “children” and includes both boys and girls. Alternate translation: “children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
EZR 10 44 kg57 figs-gendernotations בָּנִֽים 1 All of these The term **sons** here means “children” and includes both boys and girls. Alternate translation: “children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

View File

@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ NEH 2 4 a57b אֱלֹהֵ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 the God of heaven A
NEH 2 5 uv1p וָ⁠אֹמַ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 And I said to the king Alternate translation: “Then I replied to the king”
NEH 2 5 a59b figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that means, “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 5 a61b figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Nehemiah speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it seems good in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 5 ae4b figs-synecdoche וְ⁠אִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 and if your servant is good before your face Here,**face** could be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Nehemiahs request would become evident in his face first, so that would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Another possibility is that **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” or “as I stand here before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 5 ae4b figs-synecdoche וְ⁠אִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 and if your servant is good before your face Here, **face** could be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Nehemiahs request would become evident in his face first, so that would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Another possibility is that **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” or “as I stand here before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
NEH 2 5 u2zy figs-123person וְ⁠אִם־יִיטַ֥ב עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 your servant Nehemiah refers to himself as **your servant** to show his submission to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
NEH 2 5 a63b figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֧ר תִּשְׁלָחֵ֣⁠נִי אֶל־יְהוּדָ֗ה 1 that you would send me to Judah Nehemiah is really asking for permission to go, rather than asking the king to send him. But as a sign of respect, he speaks as if the king would be taking the initiative. Alternate translation: “please allow me to go to Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 2 5 df8l עִ֛יר קִבְר֥וֹת אֲבֹתַ֖⁠י 1 the city of the graves of my fathers This is similar to [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the city where my ancestors are buried”
@ -1883,4 +1883,4 @@ NEH 13 30 k1pp figs-personification וָ⁠אַעֲמִ֧ידָ⁠ה 1 Nehemiah
NEH 13 30 k1qq figs-idiom אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠מְלַאכְתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 In this context, **a man** means **each one of them** Alternate translation: “and that each one fulfilled his assigned responsibilities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 31 vl4a וּ⁠לְ⁠קֻרְבַּ֧ן הָ⁠עֵצִ֛ים בְּ⁠עִתִּ֥ים מְזֻמָּנ֖וֹת וְ⁠לַ⁠בִּכּוּרִ֑ים 1 This verse continues the sentence that begins in the previous verse, so here Nehemiah is describing two further things that he **caused to stand** or made sure happened. He is referring to the promises that the people made in their covenant to bring these contributions to the temple to support the priests and Levites. See how you translated these terms in [10:34](../10/34.md) and [10:35](../10/35.md). Alternate translation: “I also made sure that the people brought their offerings of wood and of the first crops that grow in their fields at the times when they had promised to bring them”
NEH 13 31 sh91 figs-aside זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָֽה 1 As in [4:4](../04/04.md), here Nehemiah stops addressing the readers of his story and speaks directly to God. You could indicate this by putting this verse in quotation marks. Review the note at [4:4](../04/04.md) about asides like this if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]])
NEH 13 31 ae94 figs-idiom זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָֽה 1 To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
NEH 13 31 ae94 figs-idiom זָכְרָ⁠ה־לִּ֥⁠י אֱלֹהַ֖⁠י לְ⁠טוֹבָֽה 1 To remember someone **for good** is an idiom that means to reward someone with good things for the good that they have done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

View File

@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ EST 2 22 dgp3 figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 in the nam
EST 2 23 abh3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out, and the two of them were hanged on a tree. This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EST 2 23 ld4y figs-activepassive וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the kings servants investigated Mordecais report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 23 abh4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 the two of them were hanged on a tree You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 23 y28j translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 on a tree This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or <br>“wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 23 y28j translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 on a tree This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or<br>“wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 23 g9nh figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב 1 And it was written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The kings scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 23 abh5 figs-idiom בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים 1 the book of the events of days This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a kings reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 23 abh6 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the kings presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ EST 5 13 abw3 בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the gate of the
EST 5 14 abw4 figs-explicit וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 Then … said to him The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be clearer, you could say, “Then Hamans wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 j81r וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 with all his friends This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
EST 5 14 abw5 figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 Let them make You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 i2f3 translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 a tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 5 14 i2f3 translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 a tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 5 14 k8zd translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 50 cubits high You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
EST 5 14 hiui figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 abw7 figs-explicit וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit who does the action. Probably, Hamans servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Hamans orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1074,4 +1074,4 @@ EST 10 3 act2 figs-parallelism דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠
EST 10 3 act3 figs-abstractnouns דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 10 3 wte9 figs-metaphor דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people **Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 10 3 s8f8 figs-idiom וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 and speaking peace to all its seed **Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 10 3 j161 figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 to all its seed Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 10 3 j161 figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 to all its seed Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

1 Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
299 EST 2 23 abh3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out, and the two of them were hanged on a tree. This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
300 EST 2 23 ld4y figs-activepassive וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
301 EST 2 23 abh4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 the two of them were hanged on a tree You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
302 EST 2 23 y28j translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 on a tree This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or <br>“wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or<br>“wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
303 EST 2 23 g9nh figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב 1 And it was written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
304 EST 2 23 abh5 figs-idiom בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים 1 the book of the events of days This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
305 EST 2 23 abh6 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
573 EST 5 14 abw4 figs-explicit וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 Then … said to him The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be clearer, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
574 EST 5 14 j81r וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 with all his friends This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
575 EST 5 14 abw5 figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 Let them make You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
576 EST 5 14 i2f3 translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 a tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. <br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow.<br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
577 EST 5 14 k8zd translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 50 cubits high You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
578 EST 5 14 hiui figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
579 EST 5 14 abw7 figs-explicit וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it If it is clearer in your language, you can make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1074 EST 10 3 act3 figs-abstractnouns דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1075 EST 10 3 wte9 figs-metaphor דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people **Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1076 EST 10 3 s8f8 figs-idiom וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 and speaking peace to all its seed **Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1077 EST 10 3 j161 figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 to all its seed Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

View File

@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ ACT 1 26 fk4x figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη 1 he was chosen Th
ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 02 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:1721, 2528, and 3435.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Pentecost<br><br>The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them.<br><br>### Last days<br><br>In 2:1721, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])<br><br>### The prophecy of Joel<br><br>In 2:1721, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:1718). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peters statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>### Baptize<br><br>In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])<br><br>### Wonders and signs<br><br>These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.<br><br>## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “You killed” (2:23)<br><br>The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.<br><br>### Long sentences<br><br>There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>### Poetry<br><br>The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:1721, 2528, and 3435 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
ACT 2 1 i4sa writing-newevent καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 2 1 a076 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 2 1 a425 figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages <br>to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 2 1 a425 figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages<br>to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 2 1 x075 translate-names τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 the day of Pentecost **Pentecost** is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 2 1 i4sb writing-pronouns ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ 1 they were all together Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 2 1 a077 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ ACT 2 26 a152 figs-explicit καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει
ACT 2 27 m3ij figs-quotations ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay You may have decided to turn Peters quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
ACT 2 27 a153 figs-parallelism οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
ACT 2 27 whi3 figs-youformal οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου 1 you will not abandon … nor will you allow your The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
ACT 2 27 a154 figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades The Messiah says **my soul** figuratively to mean himself, using one part of <br>his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 2 27 a154 figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades The Messiah says **my soul** figuratively to mean himself, using one part of<br>his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 2 27 a155 translate-names οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades **Hades** is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 2 27 a156 figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 2 27 rld3 figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ ACT 13 32 ipb9 0 General Information: The second quotation here is from the pr
ACT 13 32 y273 καὶ 1 And This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is Gods raising Jesus from the dead.
ACT 13 32 hr2g τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers “our ancestors.” Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 God has fulfilled this for our children You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
ACT 13 33 dy6w τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”
ACT 13 33 dy6w τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”
ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 13 33 y3tz ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 As it is also written in the second Psalm “This is what was also written in the second Psalm”
ACT 13 33 h9ir τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 the second Psalm “Psalm 2”
@ -2076,7 +2076,7 @@ ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν
ACT 17 2 qf4t διελέξατο αὐτοῖς 1 reasoned with them “debated with them” or “discussed with them”
ACT 17 3 e85n 0 General Information: Here the word “He” refers to Paul ([Acts 17:2](../17/02.md)).
ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Possible meanings are (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for “it was part of Gods plan for
ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for “it was part of Gods plan for”
ACT 17 3 ipb2 ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise “to come back to life”
ACT 17 3 b9qi ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -2538,7 +2538,7 @@ ACT 21 14 as1i figs-activepassive τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γιν
ACT 21 15 p5fm figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 21 15 p5fl figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “we” refers to some of the disciples from Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 21 15 kd5l 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Pauls time in Caesarea.
ACT 21 16 k9kr παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay The disciples from Caesarea knew **Mnason** and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
ACT 21 16 k9kr παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay The disciples from Caesarea knew **Mnason** and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
ACT 21 16 zd9i translate-names Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ 1 Mnason … from Cyprus Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 21 16 c7r2 ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 an early disciple This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
ACT 21 17 zpa7 0 General Information: Here the words “he” and “his” refers to Paul. The word “them” refers to the elders.
@ -2620,7 +2620,7 @@ ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes<br>## Structure and formatting<br
ACT 22 1 kq95 writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 2 gives background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 22 1 a8ir 0 Connecting Statement: Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
ACT 22 1 xe46 ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 brothers, and fathers This is a polite way of addressing men who are Pauls age as well as the older men in the audience.
ACT 22 1 pe8t ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 listen to my defense to you now “I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story
ACT 22 1 pe8t ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 listen to my defense to you now “I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”
ACT 22 2 b4sk τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ 1 in the Hebrew language The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
ACT 22 3 g311 figs-activepassive ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ 1 but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 22 3 d4dx figs-metonymy παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ 1 at the feet of Gamaliel Here **feet** stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -3193,4 +3193,4 @@ ACT 28 28 c575 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish le
ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles Gods message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen “some of them also will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God.
ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory 0 Connecting Statement: Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here **kingdom of God** refers to Gods rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about Gods rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here **kingdom of God** refers to Gods rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about Gods rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of the Philippians<br><br>1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)<br>1. Pauls report on his ministry (1:12-26)<br>1. Instructions<br> - To be steadfast (1:27-30)<br> - To be united (2:1-2)<br> - To be humble (2:3-11)<br> - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)<br> - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)<br>1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)<br>1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)<br>1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)<br>1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)<br>1. Final remarks<br> - Values (4:8-9)<br> - Contentment (4:10-20)<br> - Final Greetings (4:21-23)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book Philippians?<br><br>Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.<br><br>### What is the Book of Philippians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Pauls Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Philippi like?<br><br>Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?<br><br>The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey Gods commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).<br><br>### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?<br><br> Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of the Philippians<br><br>1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)<br>1. Pauls report on his ministry (1:12-26)<br>1. Instructions<br> - To be steadfast (1:27-30)<br> - To be united (2:1-2)<br> - To be humble (2:3-11)<br> - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)<br> - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)<br>1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)<br>1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)<br>1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)<br>1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)<br>1. Final remarks<br> - Values (4:8-9)<br> - Contentment (4:10-20)<br> - Final Greetings (4:21-23)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book Philippians?<br><br>Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.<br><br>### What is the Book of Philippians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Pauls Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Philippi like?<br><br>Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?<br><br>The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey Gods commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).<br><br>### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?<br><br>Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The day of Christ<br><br>This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
PHP 1 1 xk9z translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Timothy These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
PHP 1 2 uuep translate-names χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace to you and peace This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing.
@ -250,4 +250,4 @@ PHP 4 20 fba5 τῷ δὲ Θεῷ…ἡμῶν 1 Now to our God The word **Now*
PHP 4 21 h2jr οἱ…ἀδελφοί 1 The brothers This refers to those people who were either ministering with or to Paul.
PHP 4 21 z65a ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md).
PHP 4 22 rg96 μάλιστα…οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας 1 especially those from the household of Caesar This refers to servants who worked in Caesars palace. “especially the fellow believers who work in the palace of Caesar”
PHP 4 23 a3f8 figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 be with your spirit Paul refers to the believers by using the word **spirit,** which is what enables humans to relate to God. Alternate translation: “be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
PHP 4 23 a3f8 figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 be with your spirit Paul refers to the believers by using the word **spirit,** which is what enables humans to relate to God. Alternate translation: “be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

1 Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2 PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of the Philippians<br><br>1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)<br>1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)<br>1. Instructions<br> - To be steadfast (1:27-30)<br> - To be united (2:1-2)<br> - To be humble (2:3-11)<br> - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)<br> - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)<br>1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)<br>1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)<br>1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)<br>1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)<br>1. Final remarks<br> - Values (4:8-9)<br> - Contentment (4:10-20)<br> - Final Greetings (4:21-23)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book Philippians?<br><br>Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.<br><br>### What is the Book of Philippians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Philippi like?<br><br>Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?<br><br>The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).<br><br>### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?<br><br> Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) # Introduction to Philippians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of the Philippians<br><br>1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)<br>1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)<br>1. Instructions<br> - To be steadfast (1:27-30)<br> - To be united (2:1-2)<br> - To be humble (2:3-11)<br> - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)<br> - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)<br>1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)<br>1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)<br>1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)<br>1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)<br>1. Final remarks<br> - Values (4:8-9)<br> - Contentment (4:10-20)<br> - Final Greetings (4:21-23)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book Philippians?<br><br>Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.<br><br>### What is the Book of Philippians about?<br><br>Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Philippi like?<br><br>Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?<br><br>The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).<br><br>### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?<br><br>Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The day of Christ<br><br>This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
4 PHP 1 1 xk9z translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Timothy These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5 PHP 1 2 uuep translate-names χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace to you and peace This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing.
250 PHP 4 21 h2jr οἱ…ἀδελφοί 1 The brothers This refers to those people who were either ministering with or to Paul.
251 PHP 4 21 z65a ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md).
252 PHP 4 22 rg96 μάλιστα…οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας 1 especially those from the household of Caesar This refers to servants who worked in Caesar’s palace. “especially the fellow believers who work in the palace of Caesar”
253 PHP 4 23 a3f8 figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 be with your spirit Paul refers to the believers by using the word **spirit,** which is what enables humans to relate to God. Alternate translation: “be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Praise for Gods salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)<br>1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)<br>1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)<br>1. Closing (5:12-14)<br><br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).<br><br>He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peters audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br> “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”<br><br>If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Praise for Gods salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)<br>1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)<br>1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)<br>1. Closing (5:12-14)<br><br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).<br><br>He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peters audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>“You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”<br><br>If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### What God reveals<br><br>When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good Gods people were to have faith in Jesus. Then Gods people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.<br><br>### Holiness<br><br>God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Eternity<br><br>Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md))
1PE 1 1 g6b4 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing.
1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 to the elect foreigners of the dispersion Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -294,4 +294,4 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1PE 5 13 muq7 writing-symlanguage ἡ ἐν Βαβυλῶνι 1 She who is in Babylon Here, **she** probably refers to the group of believers who live in **Babylon**. Here, **Babylon** could mean: (1) This is a symbol for the city of Rome. (2) This is a symbol for anywhere that Christians are suffering. (3) This is a literal reference to the city of Babylon. It most likely refers to the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1PE 5 13 rpf5 figs-activepassive συνεκλεκτὴ 1 chosen together with you You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has chosen as he has chosen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1PE 5 13 ws2x figs-metaphor ὁ υἱός μου 1 my son Peter speaks of Mark as if he is his spiritual **son**. Alternate translation: “my spiritual son” or “who is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 5 14 fc7b φιλήματι ἀγάπης 1 a kiss of love “a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other”
1PE 5 14 fc7b φιλήματι ἀγάπης 1 a kiss of love “a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other”

1 Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2 1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)<br>1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)<br>1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)<br>1. Closing (5:12-14)<br><br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).<br><br>He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br> “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”<br><br>If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) # Introduction to 1 Peter<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of 1 Peter<br><br>1. Introduction (1:1-2)<br>1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)<br>1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)<br>1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)<br>1. Closing (5:12-14)<br><br><br>### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.<br><br>### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?<br><br>Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).<br><br>He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### How were Christians treated in Rome?<br><br>Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?<br><br>“You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”<br><br>If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### What God reveals<br><br>When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.<br><br>### Holiness<br><br>God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Eternity<br><br>Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md))
4 1PE 1 1 g6b4 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing.
5 1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 to the elect foreigners of the dispersion Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
294 1PE 5 13 muq7 writing-symlanguage ἡ ἐν Βαβυλῶνι 1 She who is in Babylon Here, **she** probably refers to the group of believers who live in **Babylon**. Here, **Babylon** could mean: (1) This is a symbol for the city of Rome. (2) This is a symbol for anywhere that Christians are suffering. (3) This is a literal reference to the city of Babylon. It most likely refers to the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
295 1PE 5 13 rpf5 figs-activepassive συνεκλεκτὴ 1 chosen together with you You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has chosen as he has chosen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
296 1PE 5 13 ws2x figs-metaphor ὁ υἱός μου 1 my son Peter speaks of Mark as if he is his spiritual **son**. Alternate translation: “my spiritual son” or “who is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
297 1PE 5 14 fc7b φιλήματι ἀγάπης 1 a kiss of love “a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other”